1988_Samsung_Linear_IC_Data_Book_Vol_2 1988 Samsung Linear IC Data Book Vol 2
User Manual: 1988_Samsung_Linear_IC_Data_Book_Vol_2
Open the PDF directly: View PDF
.
Page Count: 636
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
c8 SAMSUNO ·
Linear Ie k (VOL. 2)
Data Boo
1988
• Telecom
• Industrial
• Data Converter
Copyright 1987 by Samsung Semiconductor
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo
copying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Samsung
Semiconductor.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung
assumes no responsibility for the use of any circuitry other than circuitry embodied in
a Samsung product.
No other circuit patent licenses are implied.
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
DATA BOOK LIST
I. Semiconductor Product Guide
II. Transistor Data Book
III. Linear IC Data Book
IV. MOS Product Data Book
V. High Performance CMOS Logic Data Book
. VI. MOS Memory Data Book
VII. SFET Data Book
LINEAR Ie DATA BOOK
VOLUME 1.
AUDIO ICs
VIDEO ICs
VOLUME 2.
TELECOM ICs
VOLTAGE REGURATORs
VOLTAGE REFERENCEs
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERs
COMPARATORs
TIMERs
. DATA CONVERTER ICs
MISCELLANEOUS ICs
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(VOLUME 2)
I. QUALITY AND RELIABILITY ........................................................ 19
II. PRODUCT GUIDE ............................................................................... 49
1. Function Guide ....................................................................................... 51
2. Cross Reference Guide ........................................................................... 60 .
3. Ordering Information ...........•.................................................................. 66
III. TELECOMMUNICATION ICs, ......................................................... 67
IV. INDUSTRIAL ICs ...............................................................................
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Voltage Regulators ...............................................................................
Voltage References ..............................................................................
Operational Amplifiers.•.........................................................................
Comparators ............... :........................................... :..............................
Timers ......................... :..........................................................................
275
277
393
407
468
496
V. DATA CONVERTER ICs .................. ~ ............................................ 519
VI. MISCELLANEOUS ICs ..........................................................:........ 593
VII. PACKAGE DIMENSIONS ............................................................. 617
VIII. SALES OFFICES and MANUFACTURER'S'
REPRESENTATIVES ;....................................................................... 629
(VOLUME 1) .
I. QUALITY AND RELIABILITY
II. PRODUCT GUIDE
1. Function Guide
2. Cross Reference Guide
3. Ordering Infonnation .
III. AUDIO ICs
IV. VIDEO ICs
V. MISCELLANEOUS ICs
VI. PACKAGE DIMENSIONS
VII. SALES OFFICES and MANUFACTURER'S
REPRESENTATIVES
ALPHANUMERIC INDEX
Device
KA33V
KA201A
KA301A
KA319
KA336-5_0
KA350
KA361
KA385-1.2
KA431
KA710C
KA733C
KA1222
KA2101
KA2102A
KA2103L
KA21 04
KA2105
KA2106
KA21 07
KA2130A
KA2131
KA2133
KA2134
KA2135
KA2136
KA2137
KA2153
KA2154
KA2181
KA2182
KA2183
KA2201B
KA2201/N
KA2206
KA22062
KA2209
KA2210
KA2211
KA2212
KA2213
KA22131
KA22135
KA2214
KA2220
KA2221
KA22211
KA2223
KA22233
KA22235
KA2224
Function
Silicon Monolithic Bipolar Integrated Circuit Voltage
Stabilizer for Electronic Tuner
Single Operational Amplifier
Single Operational Amplifier
Dual High Speed Voltage Comparator
Voltage Reference Diode
3 AMP Adjustable Positive Voltage Regulator
High Speed Voltage Comparator
Micropower Voltage Reference Diode
Programmable Precision Reference
High Speed Voltage Comparator
Differential Video Amplifier
Dual Low Noise Equalizer AMP
TV Sound IF AMP
TV Sound System
Sound Mute System for TV
Auto Power off and Sound Mute System for TV
Limiter AMP and Detector for a TV SIF
Dual Sound Multiplex for a TV SIF
DC Volume, Tone Control Circuit
TV Vertical Deflection System
TV Vertical Output Circuit
1 Chip Deflection System
Color TV Deflection Signal Processing IC
Horizontal Signal Processing IC
Low Noise TV Vertical Deflection System
TV Horizontal Processor
Video-Chroma Deflection System for a Color TV
Video-Chroma Deflection System for a Color TV
Remote Control Pre-AMP
Remote Control Pre-AMP
Remote Control Pre-AMP
0.5W Audio Power AMP
1.2W Audio Power AMP
2.3W Dual Audio Power AMP
4.5W Dual Power AMP
Dual Low Voltage Power AMP
5.5W Dual Power AMP
5.8W Dual Power AMP
0.5W Audio Power AMP
One Chip Tape Recorder System
Dual Pre-Power AMP for Auto Reverse
Dual Pre-Power AMP and DC Motor Speed Controller
1W Dual Power AMP
Equalizer AMP with ALC
Dual Low Noise Equalizer AMP
Dual Low Noise Equalizer AMP
5 Band Graphic Equalizer AMP
3 Band Dual Graphic Equalizer AMP
5 Band Graphic Equalizer AMP
Dual Equalizer AMP with ALC
Package
TO-92
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
TO-92
TO-3P
14 DIP/14 SOP
TO-92
TO-9218 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 SIP
14 DIP
14 DIP HIS
8 SIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
16 DIP
12 SIP
10 SIP HIS
10 SIP HIS
16 DIP HIS
18 DIP
12 SIP
12 ZDIP/F
16 DIP
42 DIP
42 DIP
8 SIP
8 SIP
8 SIP
8 DIP
8 DIP
12DIP/F
12 SIP HIS
8 DIP
12 SIP HIS
12 SIP HIS
9 SIP
14 DIP HIS
24 SOP
22 SDIP
14 DIP HIS
9 SIP
8 SIP
8 SIP
16 DIP
22 DIP
18 ZIP
14 DIP
Page
595
407
407
468
393
277
472
397
401
474
412
Vol.1 .
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
ALPHANUMERIC INDEX
Device
KA22241
KA22251D
KA22261
KA2230
KA22421/D
KA22424
KA2243
KA2244
KA22441
KA2245
KA22461
'KA2247
KA22471
KA2248A/D
KA2249/D
KA2261
, KA2262
KA2263
KA2264/D
KA2265
, KA22682
KA2268N
KA2281
KA2283
KA2284
KA2285
KA2286
KA2287
KA2288
KA2303
KA23Q4
KA2401
KA2402
KA2404
KA2407
KA241 0
KA2411
KA2412A
KA2413
KA2418
KA2419
KA2425A/B
KA2580A
KA2588A
KA2605
KA2606
KA2615
KA2616
(Continued)
Function
Dual Equalizer AMP with ALC
Dual Pre-AMP for 3V Using
Dual Equalizer AMP with REC AMP
9-Program Music Selector
AM 1 Chip Radio
AM/FM 1 Chip Radio
AM/FM I F System
FM IF System for Car Radio
FM IF System for Car Stereo
FM IF System for Car Radio,
'
Electronic ,Tuning AM Radio Receiver for Car Stereo
FM IF/AM Tuner System
FM IF/AM Tuner System
3V FM IF/AM Tuner System
FM Front End for Portable Radio
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder for Car Stereo
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
VCO Non-Adjusting FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
1 Chip TV MPX Demodulator
1 Chip TV Sound MPX
5 DOT Dual LED Level Meter Driver
5 DOT Dual LED Level Meter Driver
5 DOT LED Level Meter Driver
5 DOT LED Level Meter Driver
5 DOT LED Linear Level Meter Driver
5 DOT LED Linear Levei Meter Driver
7 DOT LED Level Meter Driver
Toy Radio COntrol Actuator
Toy Radio Control Actuator
DC Motor Speed Controller
Low Voltage DC Motor Speed Controller
DC Motor Speed Controller
DC Motor Speed Controller
Tone Ringer
. Tone Ringer
Telephone Speech Circuits
Dual Tone Multi Frequency Generator
Tone Ringer with Bridge Diode
Tone Ringer with Bridge Diode
Telephone Speech Network with Dialer Inteiiace
8-Channel Source Drivers
8-Channel Source Drivers
SYNC Separator
SYNC Separator
LED and Lamp Driver
LED and Lamp Driver
Page
Package
9 SIP
16· DIP/16 SOP
16 DIP
22 DIP
16 DIP/16 SOP
16 DIP
16 DIP
9 SIP
16 ZIP
7 SIP
19 ZIP
16 DIP
16 DIP'
16 DIP/16 SOP
7 SIP/8 SOP
16 DIP
16 ZIP
9 SIP
9 SIP/16 SOP
16 DIP
28 DIP
28 DIP
16DIP
16 DIP
9 SIP
9SIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
16 DIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
8 DIP
8 DIP
TO-92L
' TO-126
8 DIP
8 DIP
14 DIP
16 DIP
8 DIP
8 DIP
18 DIP
18 DIP
20 DIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
9 SIP,
9 SIP
-
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol: 1
69
69
75
83
108
108
122
599
599
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
ALPHANUMERIC INDEX
Device
KA2617
KA2618
KA2651
KA2803
KA2804
KA2911
KA2912
KA2913A
KA2914A
KA2915
KA2916
KA2917
KA2918
KA2919
KA2944
KA2945
KA2983
KA2988
KA6101
KA6102
KA3524
KA78540
KA78TXX
KA8301
KA8302
KA8401
KA9256
KAD0808
KAD0809
KAD0820A/B
KDA0800
KDA0801
KDA0802
KF351
KS555
KS555H
KS556'
KS5803A1B
KS5805A1B
KS5808
KS5812
KS5819
KS5820
KS5821
KS5824
KS7126
KS25C02
(Continued)
Function
LED and Lamp Driver
LED and Lamp Driver
Fluorescent Display Drivers
Low Power Consumption Earth Leakage ,Detector
Zero Voltage Switch
Video IF System for Color TV
Video IF Processor for BIW TV
Video and Sound IF AMP for Monochrome TV Receivers
Video IF +'SIF System
TV VIF & SIF & Deflection System
Video IF System for Color TV
Video and Sound IF AMP for Monochrome TV Receivers
Video IF + SIF System
VIF + SIF System for Color TV
Write & Read AMP
Video AMP
Switch less Recording/Play Back AMP
Chroma Signal Processor
Analog Interface Circuit for Teletex 'System
Analog Interface Circuit for'Teletex System
Regulator Pulse Width Modulator
Switching Regulator
3A Positive Voltage Regulator
Driver for VTR
Servo Control AMP
VTR Audio Switchless Recording/Play Back AMP
Dual Power Operational Amplifier '
8 Bit I'p·Compatible AID Converter with 8·Channel
Multiplexer
8 Bit I'p·Compatible AID Converter. with 8·Channel
Multiplexer
8 Bit High Speed I'P Compatible AID Converter with
Track/Hold Function
8 Bit D/A Converter
8 Bit D/A Converter
8 Bit D/A Converter
Single Operating Amplifier
CMOl3 Timer
CMOS Timer
CMOS Timer
Remote Control Transmitter
Telephone Pulse Dialer with Redial
Dual Tone Multi Frequency Dialer
Quad Universial Asychronous Receiver and Transmitter
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Universial Asychronous Receiver and Transmitter
3 1/2 Digit AID Conve,rter
8 Bit CMOS Successive Approximation Register
Package
9 SIP
9 SIP
18 DIP
8 DIP
8 DIP
16 DIP
14 DIP HIS
16 DIP
24 DIP
28 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
24 DIP
30 SSD
28 DIP
28 DIP
18 DIP
28 DIP
18'DIP
18 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
TO·220
10 SIP HIS
12 SIP
24 ZIP
10 SIP HIS
Page
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
604
607
610
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
,Vol. 1
285
306
312
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
419
28 DIP
549
28 DIP
549
20 DIP
560
16 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
' 16 DIP/20 SOP
18'DIP
16 DIP
40 DIP
22 DIP/SDIP
18 DIP
22DIP/SDIP
24 DIP
40 DIP
16 DIP/24 SDIP
580
580
580
421
496
501
505
Vol. 1
130
146
152
162
172
162
180
568
586
;
ALPHANUMERIC INDEX
Device
KS25C03
KS25C04
KSV3100A
. KSV3110
KSV3208
KT3040J
KT3054J
KT3064J
KT5116J
LM211
LM224/A
LM239/A
LM248
LM2581~
LM293/A
LM311
LM317
LM323
LM324/A
LM339/A
LM348·
LM3581A/S
LM3861S/D
LM393/A1S
LM567C
LM567L
LM723
LM741C/ElI
LM2901
LM2902
LM2903
LM2904
LM3302
MC14581C/SII
MC1488
MC1489/A
MC3303
MC3361
MC3403
MC45581C/A/SII
MC78XX
MC78LXX
MC78MXX
MC79XX
MC79MXX
NE555
NE556
NE558
(Continued)
Function
8 Bit CMOS Successive Approximation Register
12 Bit CMOS Successive Approximation Register
H,igh-Speed AlD-DA Converter
High-Speed AlD-DA Converter
High-Speed AID Converter
PCM Monolithic Filter
COMBO CODEC
COMBO CODEC
wLaw Companding CODEC
Voltage Comparator
Quad Operational AmplHier
Quad Differential Comparator
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Dual Differential Comparator
Voltage Comparator
3-Terminal Positive Adjustable Regulator
3-Terminal Positive Voltage Regulator
Quad Operational Amplifier
Quad Differential Comparator
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Low Voltage Audio Power AMP
Dual Differential Comparator
Tone Decoder
Micropower Tone Decoder
Precision Voltage Regulator
Single qperationai Amplifier,
Quad Differential Comparator
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Differential Comparator
Dual Operational Amplifier
Quad Differential Comparator
Dual Operational Amplifier
Quad Line Driver
Quad Line Receiver
Quad Operational Amplifier
Low Power Narrow Band FMIF
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
3-Terminal 1A Positive Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal Positive Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal 0.5A Positive Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal Negative Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal 0.5A Negative'Voltage Regulator
Timer
Dual Timer
Quad Timer
Package
Page
16 DIP/24SDIP
24DIP/24SDIP
40 DIP
40 DIP
28 DIP
16 CERDIP
16 CERDIP
20 CERDIP
16 CERDIP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
TO-220
TO-3P
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8, SOP/9 SIP
9 SIP/8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/S SOP
8 DIPj8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP.
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
14 DIPI14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIPI14 SOP
16 DIP/16 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
TO-220
TO-92
TO-220
TO-220
TO-220
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
16 DIP/16 SOP
586
586
521
531
541
191
200
214
226
476
423
481
432
438
489
476
291
296
423
481
432
438
613
489
239
247
300
446
481
423
489
438
481
452
257
264
456
270
456
463
323
353
364
377
387
509
513
516
PRODUCT INDEX
1. Audio Application
Device
KA1222
KA2201B
KA2201lN
KA2206
KA22062
·KA2209
KA221 0
KA2211
KA2212
KA2213
KA22131
KA22135
KA2214
KA2220
KA2221
KA22211
KA2223
KA22233
KA22235
KA2224
KA22241
KA2225/D
KA22261
KA2230
KA22421/D
KA22424
KA2243
KA2244
KA22441
KA2245
KA22461
KA2247
KA22471
KA2248A1D
KA2249/D
KA2261
KA2262
KA2263
KA2264/D
KA2265
. KA2281
KA2283
KA2284
KA2285
KA2286
KA2287
KA2288
LM386/S/D
KA2303
KA2304
KA2401
. Function
Dual Low Noise Equalizer AMP
O.5W Audio Power AMP
1.2W Audio Power AMP
2.3W Dual Audio Power AMP
4.5W Dual Power AMP
Dual Low Voltage Power AMP
5.5W Dual Power AMP
5.8W Dual Power AMP
O.5W Audio Power AMP
One Chip Tape Recorder System
Dual Pre·Power AMP for Auto Reverse
Dual Pre·Power AMP and DC Motor Speed Controller
1W Dual Power AMP
Equalizer AMP with ALC
Dual Low Noise Equalizer AMP
Dual Low Noise Equalizer AMP
5 Band Graphic Equalizer AMP
3 Band Dual Graphic Equalizer AMP
5 Band Graphic Equalizer AMP
Dual Equalizer AMP with ALC
Dual Equalizer AMP with ALC
Dual Pre·AMP for 3V Using
Dual Equalizer AMP with REC AMP
9-Program Music Selector
AM 1 Chip Radio
AM/FM 1 Chip Radio
AM/FM IF System
FM IF System for Car Radio
FM IF System for Car Stereo
FM IF System for Car Radio
Electronic Tuning AM Radio Receiver for Car Stereo
FM IF/AM Tuner System
FM IF/AM Tuner System
3V FM IF/AM Tuner System
FM Front End for Portable Radio
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder for Car Stereo
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
VCO Non-Adjusting FM Stereo Multiplex Decoder
5 DOT Dual LED Level Meter Driver
5 DOT Dual LED Level Meter Driver
.5 DOT LED Level Meter Driver
5 DOT LED Level Meter Driver
5 DOT LED Linear Level Meter Driver
5 DOT LED Linear Level Meter Driver
7 DOT LED Level Meter Driver
Low Voltage Audio Power AMP
Toy Radio Control Actuator
Toy Radio Control Actuator
DC Motor Speed Controller
Package
Page
8 SIP
8 DIP
8 DIP
12DIP/F
12 SIP HIS
8 DIP
12 SIP HIS
12 SIP HIS
9 SIP
14 DIP HIS
24 SOP
22 SDIP
.14 DIP HIS
9 SIP
8 SIP
8 SIP
16 DIP
22 DIP
18 ZIP
14 DIP
9 SIP
16 DIP/16 SOP
16 DIP
22 DIP
16 DIP/16 SOP
16 DIP
16 DIP
9SIP
16 ZIP
.7 SIP
19 ZIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP/16 SOP
7 SIP/8 SOP
16 DIP
16 ZIP
9 SIP
9 SIP/16 SOP
16 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
9SIP
16 DIP
9 SIP/8 DIP/8 SOP
9 SIP
9 SIP
8 DIP
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
613
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
PRODUCT INDEX
(Continued)
1. Audio Appllcatlori
(Continued)
Device
KA2402
KA2404
KA2407
Function
Low Voltage DC Motor Speed Controller
DC Motor Speed Controller
DC Motor Speed Controller
Package
8 DIP
TO-92L
TO-126
Page
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
2. Video Application
Device
KA2101
KA2102A
KA2103L
KA21 04
KA2105
KA2106
KA2107
KA2130A
KA2131
KA2133
KA2134
KA2135
KA2136
KA2137
KA2153
KA2154
KA2181
KA2182
KA2183
KA22682
KA2268N
KA2605
KA2606
KA2615
KA2616
KA2617
KA2618
KA2911
KA2912
KA2913A
KA29l4A
KA2915
KA2916
KA2917
KA2918
KA2919
KA2944
KA2945
KA2983
KA2988
KA6101,
KA6102
KA8301
KA8302
KA8401
KS5803A/B
Function
TV Sound IF AMP
TV Sound System
Sound Mute System for TV
Auto Power off and Sound Mute System for TV
limiter AMP and Detector for a TV SIF
Dual Sound Multiplex for a TV SIF
DC Volume, Tone Control Circuit
TV Vertical Deflection System
TV Vertical Output Circuit
1 Chip Deflection System
Color TV Deflection Signal Processing IC
Horizontal Signal Processing IC
Low Noise TV Vertical Deflection System
TV HOrizontal Processor
Video-Chroma Deflection System for a Color TV
Video-Chroma Deflection System for a Color TV
Remote Control Pre-AMP
Remote Control Pre-AMP
j'\emote Control Pre-AMP
1 Chip TV MPX Demodulator
1 Chip TV Sound MPX
SYNC Separator
SYNC Separator
LED and Lamp Driver
LED and Lamp Driver
LED and Lamp Driver
LED and Lamp Driver
Video IF System for Color TV
Video I F Processor for BIW TV
Video and Sound IF AMP for Monochrome TV Receivers
Video IF + SIF System
TV VIF & SIF & Deflection System
Video IF System for Color TV
Video and Sound IF AMP for Monochrome TV Receivers
Video IF+SIF System
VIF + SIF System for Color TV
Write & Read AMP
Video AMP
Swltchless Recording/Play Back AMP
Chroma Signal Processor
Analog Interface Circuit for Teletex System
Analog Interface Circuit for Teletex System
Driver for VTR
Servo Control AMP
VTR Audio Swltchless Recordlng/Play Back AMP
Remote Control Transmitter
Package
14 DIP
14 DIP HIS
8 SIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
16 DIP
12 SIP
10 SIP HIS
10 SIP HIS
16 DIP HIS
18 DIP
12 SIP
12 ZDIP/F
16 DIP
42 DIP
42 DIP
8 SIP
8SIP
8 SIP
28 DIP
28 DIP
9 SIP
9SIP
9 SIP
9 SIP
9SIP
9 SIP
16 DIP
14 DIP HIS
16 DIP
24 DIP
28 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
24 DIP
30 SSD
28 DIP
28 DIP
18 DIP
28 DIP
18 DIP
18 DIP
10 SIP HIS
12 SIP
24 ZIP
16 DIP/20 SOP
Page
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
VOl:, 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol.,l
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
Vol. 1
PRODUCT INDEX
(Continued)
3. Telecommunication Application
Function.
Device
KA241 0
KA2411
KA2412A
KA2413
KA2418
KA2419
KA2425A/B
KS5805A/B
KS5808
KS5812
KS5819
KS5820
KS5821
KS5824
KT3040J
KT3054J
KT3064J
KT5116J
LM567C
LM567L
MC1488
MC1489/A
MC3361
KA2580A
KA2588A
KA2651
Package
Tone· Ringer
Tone Ringer
Telephone Speech Circuits
Dual Tone Multi Frequency Generator
Tone Ringer with Bridge Diode
.
Tone ·Rlnger with Bridge Diode
Telephone Speech Network with Dialer Interface
Telephone Pulse Dialer with Redial
Dual Tone Multi Frequency Dialer
Quad Universial Asychronous Receiver and Transmitter
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Universlal Asychronous Receiver and Transmitter
PCM Monolithic Filter
COMBO CODEC
COMBO CODEC
,.-Law Companding CODEC
Tone Decoder
Mlcropower Tone Decoder
Quad Line Driver
Quad Line Receiver
Low Power Narrow Band FM IF
8-Channel Source Drivers
8-Channel Source Drivers
Fluorescent Display Drivers
-
8 DIP
8 DIP
14 DIP
16 DIP
8 DIP
8 DIP
18 DIP
18 DIP
16 DIP
40 DIP
22 DIP/SDIP
18 DIP
22DIP/SDIP
24 DIP
16 CERDIP
16 CERDIP
20 CERDIP
16 CERDIP
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
16 DIP/16 SOP
18 DIP
20 DIP
18 DIP
Page
69
69
75
83
108
108
112
130
146
152
162
172
162
180
19'
200 .
214
226
239
247
257
264
270
599
599
604
4. Industrial Application
Device
KA201A
KA301A
KA319
KA336-5.0
KA350
KA361
KA385-1.2
KA431
KA710C
KA733C
KA3524
KA9256
KF351·
KS555
KS555H
KS556
LM211
Function
Single Operational Amplifier
Single Operational Amplifier
Dual High Speed Voltage Comparator
Voltage Reference Diode
3 AMP Adjustable Positive Voltage Regulator
High Speed Voltage Comparator
Micropower Voltage Reference· Diode
Programmable Precision Reference
High Speed Voltage Comparator
Differential Video Amplifier
Regulator Pulse Width Modulator
Dual Polt'l(er Operational Amplifier
Single Operating Amplifier
CMOS Timer
CMOS Timer
CMOS Timer
Voltage Comparator
Package
Page
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
TO·92
TO·3P
14 DIP/14 SOP
TO·92
TO·9218 DIP/S SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
16 DIP
10 SIP H/S
8DIP/8·S0P
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/S SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
407
407
463
393
277
472
397
401
474
412
285
419
421
496
501
505
476
PRODUCT INDEX
Industrial Application
(Continued)
(Continued)
Device
LM224/A
LM239/A
LM248
LM258/A
LM293/A
LM311
LM317
LM323
LM324/A
LM339/A
LM348
LM3581A/S
LM3931A1S
LM723
LM741C/ElI
LM2901
LM2902
LM2903
LM2904
LM3302
MC14581C/SII
MC3303
MC3403
MC45581CIAISIl
MC78XX
MC78LXX
MC78MXX
MC79XX
MC79MXX
KA78540
KA78TXX
NE555
NE556
NE558
KA2803
KA2804
KA33V
Function
Quad Operational Amplifier
Quad Differential Comparator
Quad Operational Amplifier
JDual Operational Amplifier
Dual Differential Comparator
Voltage Comparator
3-Terminal Positive Adjustable Regulator
3-Terminal Positive Voltage Regulator
Quad Operational Amplifier
. Quad Differential Comparator
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Dual Differential Comparator
Precision Voltage Regulator
Single Operational Amplifier
Quad Differential Comparator
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Differential Comparator
iDual Operational Amplifier
Quad Differential Comparator
Dual Operational Amplifier
Quad Operational Amplifier
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
3-Terminal 1A Positive Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal Positive Voltage Rllgulator
3-Terminal 0.5A Positive Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal Negative Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal 0.5A Negative Voltage Regulator
Switching Regulator
3A Positive Voltage Regulator
Timer
Dual Timer
Quad Timer
Low Power Consumption Earth Leakage Detector
Zero Voltage Switch
Silicon Monolithic Bipolar Integrated Circuit Voltage
Stabilizer for Electronic Tuner
Package
Page
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
·8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
TO-220
TO-3P
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIR
14 DIP/14 SOP' .
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
TO-220
TO-92
TO-220
TO-220
TO-220
16 DIP
TO-220
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
16 DIP/16 SOP
8 DIP
8 DIP
TO-92
423
481
432
438
489
476
291
296
423
481
432
438
489
300
446
481
423
489
438
481
452
456
·456
463
323
353
364
377
387
306
312
509
513
516
607
610
295
Package
Page
5. Data Converter Application
Device
KSV3100A
KSV3110
KSV3208
KAD0808
KAD0809
KAD0820A/B
KDA0800
KDA0801
KDA0802
KS25C02
KS25C03
KS25C04
KS7126
Function
High-Speed A/D-DA Converter
High-Speed AlD-DA Converter
High-Speed AID Converter
8 Bit I-'p-Compatible AID Converter with 8-Channel
Multiplexer
8 Bit I-'p-Compatible AID Converter with 8-Channel
Multiplexer
8,Bit High Speed I-'P Compatible AID Converter with
Track/Hold Function
8 Bit D/A Converter
8 Bit D/A Converter
8 Bit D/A Converter
8 Bit CMOS Successive Approximation Register
8 Bit CMOS Successive Approximation Register
12 Bit CMOS Successive Approximation Register
3 1/2 Digit AID Converter
40 DIP
40 DIP
28 DIP
521
531
541
28 DIP
549
28 DIP
549
20 DIP
560
16 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
16 DIP
24SDIP
40 OIP
580
580
580
586
586
586
568
•
.
QUALITY & RELIABILITY
"
;:
,1,'1
;~
f ,'f
t·, I
.:
~
1
•
,,',
_
...v
,',
'
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
INTRODUCTION
Samsung's linear IG products are among the most reliable in the industry. Samsung has always made a commit·
ment to achieve the highest possible quality, reliability, and customer satisfaction with its products.
Extensive qualification, monitor and outgoing programs are used to scrutinize product quality and reliability.
·Stringent controls are applied to every wafer fabrication and assembly lot to achieve reproducibility, and therefore
maintain product reliability.
In this chapter, the quality and reliability programs established at Samsung will be discussed. In addition, a description
of reliability theory, reliability tests and various support efforts provides a broad framework from which to compre·
hend Samsung quality and reliability.
.
To better understand the Quality Department's role in product develoment and manufacturing, Ii detailed diagram
is listed below. As can be noted, Quality Engineering is involved in all phases, save that of initial product planning.
STEP
~
z
SALES
1
1
SPEC. REVIEW
:II!
~
.....a:
DESIGN
1
1
I
DESIGN REVIEW
1
z
PRODUCTION
CONTROL
PRODUCTION
I
COUNCIL FOR 'DEVELOPMENT
I
I
Cl
II.
OC/OA
1
MARKET SURVEY
I
~
"-
PROCESS ENG'S
QUALIFICATION FOR RAW MATERIAL
1
1
l
m
Q
I
TRIAL MFG
I'
EVALUATION & QUALIFICATION
1
z
~
STANDARDIZATION
1
~
~
APPROVAL
1
·II-----------------------l
"III
a:
"-
QUALIFICATION
1
1
I
z
S
u
MASS PRODUCTION
0
I~=P=R=O=C~==S=M=O=N=IT=OR==~~
"-
1
c·
I
CI
a:
:g
:II!
I
Iii
":II!a:
1
1
I
RELIABILITY TEST
LOT ACCEPTANCE TEST
FAILURE ANALYSIS
CLAIM
J
INCOMING INSP.
PROCESS CONTROL
:>
P.P
1
INITIATE CORRECTIVE ACTION
I
SHIPPING
1
CUSTOMER
1
C
Figure 1. Quality Assurance During
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Develop~ent
21
I
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
QUALITY AND RELIABILITY PROGRAM
Since Samsung manufactures many different products using a variety of fab and assembly technologies, close
attention must be paid to avariety of (potential) reliability hazards. The Samsung quality and reliability department
has established a variety of procedures and programs to assess, understand, control, and eliminate reliability
problems.
The major categories of reliability program management are: '
a. Qualification program
b. Monitor program
c. Outgoing quality program
QUALIFICATION PROGRAM
Samsung' qualification procedures are used mainly to confirm the major characteristics and reliability attributes
of new technologies or products for introduction to Samsung manufacturing. The program is also utilited to
evaluate changes to existing technologies or raw materials. The purpose of this program is to simulate all relevant
user conditions, via accelerated and standard methods, prior to product shipment. The stresses used for qualification are detailed in following sections.
MONITOR PROGRAM
Twice per year, devices duplicate their qualification tests to obtain long-term reliability data for Linear ICs.
In this way historical data is collected and analyzed over all part types and thus assures the customer of ongoing
device quality.
These results are summarized in reliability reports issued periodically by Samsung Semiconductor.
OUTGOING QUALITY PROGRAM
All wafer lots are required to pass a "QC-reliability-gate" prior to product shipment. The purpose is to track "Lot·
by-lot" quality and reliability to catch any potential product anomaly at the factory site.
The customer can then expect only quality material to be delivered, from Samsung. Any lot that fails the procedure
l,isted below is scrutinized heavily, to make sure that corrective action takes place immediately.
By paying such close attention to every lot, product costs are kept at a minimum. Samsung's customer return rate
is extremely low, which is where our tough outgoing policy is most powerful. Such a tight clamp to protect our
customers is how we can assure that all Samsung's products are released with the highest confidence level possible.
HOPL 168HR
PCT 48HR
REJECT
(Corrective Action Required)
WAREHOUSE INCOMING INSPECTION
Figure 2. Linear Ie Outgoing Flow
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUcroR
22
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
RELIABILITY TESTS
Samsung has established a comprehensive reliability program to monitor and ensure the ongoing reliability of the
linear IC family. This program involves not only reliability data collection and analysis on existing parts, but also
rigorous in-line quality controls for all products.
Listed below are details of tests performed to ensure that manufactured product continues to meet Samsung's
stringent quality standards. In line quality controls are reviewed extensively in later sections.
The tests run by the quality department are accelerated tests, serving to model "real world" applications through
boosted temperature, voltage, and/or humidities. Accelerated conditions are used to derive device knowledge through
means quicker than that of typical application situtations. These accelerated conditions are then used to assess
differing failure rate mechanisms that correlate directly with ambient conditions. Following are summaries of various
stresses (and their conditions) run by Samsung on linear IC products.
HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATING LIFE TEST (HOPL)
(TJ=125°C, Vee = Vee max, static)
High temperature operating life test is performed·to measure actual field reliability. Life tests of l000HR to 2000HR
durations are used to accelerate failure mechanisms by operating the device at an elevated ambient temperature
(125°C). Data obtained from this test are used to predict product infant mortality, early life, and random failure
rates. Data are translated to standard operating temperatures via failure analysis to determine the activation
energy of each of the observed failures, using the Arrhenius relationship as previously discussed.
WET HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATING LIFE TEST (WHOPL)
(Ta=85°C, R.H.=81%, Vee = Vee opt, statiC)
Wet high temperature operating life test is performed to evaluate the moisture resistanr.e characteristics of plastiC
encapsulated componenots. Long time testing is performed under static bias conditions at 85°C/81 percent relative
humidity with nominal voltages. To maximize metal corroSion, the biasing configuration utilizes low power levels.
INTERMITTENT OPERATING LIFE (IOPL)
(Pmax, 25°C, 2min on/2 min off)
This test is normally applied to scrutinize die bond thermal fatigue. A stressed device undergoes an "ON" cycle,
where there is thermal heating due to power dissipation, and an "OFF" cycle, where there is thermal cooling due
to lack of inputted power. Die attach (between die and package) and bond attach (between wire and die) are the
critical areas of concern.
HIGH TEMPERATURE STORAGE TEST (HTS)
(Ta = 125°C, UNBIASED)
High temperature storage is a test in which devices are subjected to elevated temperatures with no applied bias.
The test is used to detect mechanical instabilities such as bond integrity, and process wearout mechanisms.
PRESSURE COOKER TEST (PCT)
(121°C, 15PSIG, 100% R.H., UNBIASED)
The pressure cooker test checks for resistance to moisture penetration. A highly pressurized vessel is used to
force water (thereby promoting corrosion) into packaged devices located within the vessel.
TEMPERATURE CYCLING (TIC)
(-65°C to + 150°C, AIR, UNBIASED)
This stess uses a chamber with alternating temperatures of - 65°C and + 150°C (air ambient) to thermally cycle
devices within it. No bias is applied. The cycling checks for mechanical integrity of the packaged device, in
particular bond wires and die attach, along with metallpolysilicon microcracks.
THERMAL SHOCK (TIS)
(-65°C to + 150°C, LIQUID, UNBIASED)
This stress uses a chamber with alternting temperatures of - 65°C to + 150°C (liquid ambient) to thermally cycle
devices within it. No bias is applied. The cycling is very rapid, and primarily checks for die/package compatibility.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
23
I
. QUALITY and RELIABILITY
RELIABILITY TEST RESULTS·
This section is divided into two parts-actual and predicted test results. Actual test results are those derived via
accelerated stressing done by the
department. Predicted results are calculated by taking actual test results
and derating them using statistical and mathematical models to determine device performance in "real-time" user
conditions.
ac
ACTUAL TEST RESULTS
Stress
Conditions
HOPL
Tj = 125°C
. Vcc = Vee max
(KA2102A)
Number of
Devices
Number of Device
Hours/Cycles
Number of
Failures
% Failures per
l000HRS (Cycles)
(60% UCL)
100
100,000
0
0.91%/1K HR
WHOPL
85° C/81 % R.H.
Vcc = Vee opt
100
100,000
0
0.91%I1K HR
·IOPL
Ta=25°C
Vee = Vee max
100
100,000
0
0.91%/1K HR
HTS
Ta= 125°C
Unbiased.
100
100,000
0
0.91%/1K HR
PCT
121°C
15 PSIG
100
16,800
0
5.4 %/1K HR
TIC
-65°C to 150°C
Air to Air
100
10,000
0
9.1 %/1K CL
TIS
:... 65°C to 150°C
Liquid to Liquid
100
10,000
0
9.1 %/1K CL
PREDICTED .TEST RESULTS
The Arrhenius equation, which is reviewed in another seotion of this chapter, can be applied to derive typical "userconditio(l" device failure rates.
STESS: HOPL
100,000 Device Hours at 125°C
Average Activation Energy: 1.(> eV.
De-Rating to User Conditions Yields:
55°C Operation
70°C Operation
Equivalent
Device Hours
% Failures Per
1000 Hours
(60% UCL)
"FITs
""MTBF.
(Years)
Equivalent
Device Hours
% Failures Per
1000 Hours
(600% UCL)·
"FITs
""MTBF
(Years)
10.7 x 1()6
0.0084
84
1359
50.4 x 106
0.0018
18
6342
• FIT
: Failure in time or failure unit. Represents
the number of failures expected for 109 (one
billion) device hours.
•• MTBF: Mean time between failures.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
24
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
RELIABILITY AND PREDICTION THEORY
RELIABILITY
Reliability can be loosely characterized as long term product quality.
There are two types of reliability tests: those performed during design and development, and those carried out
in production. The first type is usually performed on a limited sample, but for long periods or under very accelerated
conditions to investigate wearout mechanisms and determine tolerances and limits in the design process. The
second type of tests is performed periodically during production to check, maintain, and improve the assured quality
and reliability levels. All reliability tests performed' by Samsung are under conditions more severe than those
encountered in the field, and although accelerated, are chosen to simulate stresses that devices will be subjected
to in actual operation. Care is taken to ensure that the failure modes and mechanisms are unchanged.
FUNDAMENTALS
'A semiconductor device is very dependent on its conditions of use (e.g., junction temperature, ambient temperature, voltage, current, etc.). Therefore, to predict failure rates, accelerated reliability testing is generally used. In
accelerated testing, special stress conditions are considered as parametrically related to actual failure modes.
Actual operating life time is predicted using this method. Through accelerated stresses, component failure rates
are ascertained in terms of how many devices (in percent) are expected to fail for every 10pD hours of operation.
A typical failure rate versus time of activity graph is shown below (the so-called "bath tub curve")
(t)
Reduction due to
Failure ...._......l. . ._ _ _ _ _-,:-_ _ _ _....",,_-,-_ _ preventive maintenance
rate
m 1
=
S
" .. '
Specified
Failure Rate
emlcond- - - oct
(m:::: o.5_o%feVlces
Initial
Random Failure period
Failure period
Wear-Out Failure period
Figure 3_ Failure Rate Curve ("Bath Tub Curve")
During their initial time period, products are affected by "infant mortality," intrinsic to all semiconductor technologies.
End users are ,very sensitive to this parameter, which causes early assembly/operation .failures in their own
system. Perl~dically, Samsung reviews and publishes life time resultll. The goal is a steady shift of the limits as
shown below.
=~;:m
\1'":
J
---,Ir-/::,.-t-----/
I
I
I
I
!---t
/::,.:
failure rate
--TIME
Figure 4. Failure Rate
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONPUCTOR
25
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
ACCELERATED HUMIDITY TESTS
To evaluate the reliability of products assembled in plastic packages, Samsung performs accelerated humidity
stressing, such as the Pressure Cooker, Test (PCT) and Wet High Temperature Operating Life Test (WHOPL).
Figure 5 shows some results obtained with these tests, which illustrate the improvements in recent years. These
'improvements result mainly from the intro.Quction of purer molding reSins, new process methods, and improved
cleanliness.
10- 5
--
~ VI
I
R-
-.10- 6
~
5
ff.~
~
~10- 7
::
fi:
1/:"
t;0
~
R:
W
f;j
r,;,0"
."
-lt'J ""
ao
100
ILj
"R:~
10- 8
~~'
~
'"
[@
'I. 'ff. rl
5
~'S.
5
rl
10-
·I~
,,'":1
5
• 25
40
.,
~
60
125 150
1ao 1200 Til C)
Figure 5. Improvement In Humidity Reliability
ACCELERATED TEMPERATURE TESTS
Accelerated temperature tests are carried out at temperatures ranging from 75°C to 200°C for up to 2000 hours.
These tests allow Samsung to evaluate reliability rapidly and economically, as failure rates are strongly dependent
on temperature.
The validity of these tests is demonstrated by the good correlation betw~n data collected in the field and laboratory
results obtained using the Arrhenius model. Figure 6 shows the relationship between failure rates and temperatures
obtained with this model.
11eac
,,
99.9
,99
90
1982
1985
~
L
If
1988
L
V.....-: iI'
0,1
10
10'
HOURS
Figure 6. Failure Rate Versus Temperature
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
26
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
FUNDAMENTAL THEORY FOR ACCELERATED TESTING
Accelerated life testing is powerful because of its strong relation to failure physics. The Arrhenius model, which
is generally used for failure modelling, is explained below.
1. Arrhenius model
This model can be applied to accelerated Operating Life Tests and uses absolute (Kelvin) temperatures.
L = A + EalK·Tj
L : Lifetime
A : Constant
Ea : Activation Energy
K : Boltzman's constant
Tj : Absolute Junction temperature
If Lifetimes L1 and L2 correspond to Temperatures T1 and T2:
L1 = L2 exp
Ea
1
K (1'1 -
1
T2 )
Lifetime(L)
Temperature 11T (OK-1)
Actual junction temperature should always be used, and can be computed using the following relationship.
Tj=Ta+(Px Bja)
Where Tj = Junction temperature
Ta = Ambient temperature
, P = Actual power consumption
Bja=Junction to Ambient thermal resistance (typica"y 100 degrees celsius/watt for a 16-Pin PDIP).
2. Activation Energy Estimate
Clearly the choice of an appropriate activation energy, Ea, is of paramount importance. The different mechanisms
which could lead to circuit failure are characterized by specific activation energies whose values are published
in the literature, The Arrhenius equation describes the rate of many processes. responsible for the degradation
and failure of electronic components. It follows that the transition of an item from an initially stable condition to
a defined degraded state occurs by a thermally activated mechanism. The time for this transition is given by an
equation of the form:
MTBF = B EXP (EalKT)
MTBF = Mean time between failures
B
= Temperature-independent constant
MTBF can be defined as the time to suffer a device degradation. The dramatic effect of the choice of the Ea va!ue
can be seen by plotting the MTBF equation. The acceleration effect for a 125°C device junction stress with respect
to 70°C actual device junction operation is equal to 1000 for Ea=1eV and 7 for Ea=0.3eV.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
27
I
. QUALITY and RELIABIUTY
Some words of caution are needed about published values of Ea:
A. They are often related to high-temp tests where a single Ea (with high value) mechanism has become dominant.
B. They are specifically related to the devices produced by that supplier (and to Its technology) fo~ a given period
of time
..
C. They could be modified by the mutual action of other stresses (voltage, mechanical, etc.)
D. Field device-application conditlon(s) should be considered.
(Activation energy for each failure mode)
THE CORRECT PROCEDURE
Failure Mechanism
Ea
Contamination
Polarization
Aluminum Migration
Trapping
Oxide Breakdown
Silicon Defects
1-1.4 eV
1 eV
0.5 -1 eV
1 eV
0.3 eV
0.3-0.5 eV
. ACCELERATED TEST
I
CALCULATED AT TEST CONDITIONS
AND WITH A CERiAiN CONFIDENCE
LEVEL
FAILURE ANALYSIS
I
CHOICE OF Ea---CALCULATED AT OTHER
TEMPERATURES
Time
1.4 e"r -leV
1()6
/
1()6
l;
~c
104
~
~
1()3
0.8e~
/
./
./
.O.5~
0
""
-<
102
10'
l()1l
V
J
II
. 250
'/
/
./
./
./
....
~
200 175 150125.
100
0.4 eY:lii!!
0.3eV-
",
75
50
T("C)
Junction 1;emperature
Figure 7. Life Hours
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
28
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Failure Rate Prediction
AccEllerated testing defines the failure rate of products. By derating the data at different conditions, the life
expectancy at actual operating conditions can be predicted. In its simplest form the failure rate (at a given temperatlJre)
is:
N
FR=1)H
Where FR
N
=Failure Rate
=Number of failures
o = Number of components
H = Number of testing hours
If we intend to determine the FR at different temperatures, an acceleration factor must be considered. Some failure
modes are accelerated via temperature stressing based upon the accelerations of the Arrhenius Law.
For two different temperatures:
FR (T1) = FR (T2) exp
Ea
1
If ( T2
1
- T1 )
FR (T1) is a point estimate, but to evaluate this data for an interval estimate, we generally use a X2 (chi square)
.
distribution. An example follows:
Failure Rate Elaluation
Unit: %/1000HR
Dev. x Hours
at 125°C
Fail
1.7x1OS
2
Failure Rate at 60% Confidence Level
Point Estimate
0.18
I
I
85·C
0.0068
I
I
70·C
0.0018
I
I
55·C
0.00036
The activation energy, from analYSis, was chosen as 1.0 eV based upon test results. The failure rate at the lower
operating temperature can be extrapolated by an Arrhenius plot.
.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
29
I
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
PROCESS CONTROL
GENERAL PROCESS CONTROL
.
'
,
.
The general process flow in Samsung is shown in Figure 8. This illustration contains the standard process flow
from incoming parts and materials to customer shipment.
Acceptance inspection (according to acceptance inspection plan)
Process quality control
• Check of each condition by process quality control procedures
• Process insPection
• Lot control
• Equipment calibration and maintenance
100% Electrical Die Sorting
Process Quality Control and screening of infant mortality defects
• Mechanical screen
• Thermal shock
• Burn·in
100% package sorting of electrical characteristics and marking
Reliability monitoring
1. PRT (Process Reliability Testing)
2. DRT (Device Reliability Testing)
• High Temperature Operating Life Test
• Environmental test
• Life Test
Finished Goods
Incoming
Inspection
Sampling Inspection
• Dimensions
• Visual
• Electrical characteristics
• Periodic calibration of measuring equipment
Stock control
• Age control
Sampling Inspection (when applicable)
Shipment
Figure 8. General Process Flow CharI
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
30
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
WAFER FABRICATION
Process Controls
The Quality Control program utilizes the following methods of control to achieve its previously stated objectives:
process audits, environmental monitors, process monitors, lot acceptance inspections, and process integrity audits.
Definitions
The essential method of the Quality Control Program is 'defined as follows:
1. Process Audit-Performed on all operations critical to product quality and reliability.
2_ Environmental Monitor-Monitors concerning the process environment, i.e., water purity, temperature, humidity,
particle counts.
3. Process Monitor-Periodic inspection at designated process steps' for verification of manufacturing inspection
and maintenance of process average. These inspections provide both attribute and variable data.
4. Lot Acceptance-Lot-by-Iot sampling. This sampling method is reserved for those operations deemed as critical,
and require special attention.
Environmental Monitor
Spec_ Limit
Control Item
Process
Clean Room
•
•
•
•
0.1. Water
• Particle
• Bacteria
• Resistivity
Temperature
Humidity
Particle
Air Velocity
•
•
•
•
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Insp_ Frequency
24
24
24
24
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
• 5 ea/50ml (0.81')
• 50 colonies/100m I (0.451')
• Main (Line): More than
16 Mohm-cm
• Using pOint: More than
14 Mohm-cm
Hrs.
Hrs.
Hrs .
Hrs.
24 Hrs.
Weekly
24 Hrs.
24 Hrs.
• Instruments
• FMS (Facility Monitoring System) HIAc/ROYCO
• CPM (Central Particle Monitoring System-Dan Scientific)
• Liquid Dust Counter Etch Rate
• Filtration System for Bacterial check
• Air Particle counter
• Air Velocity meter
Process Monitor
Photo
•
•
•
•
•
•
Etch
• Etchant Temp.
• Etch Rate
• Spin Dry~r N2 Flow
RPM
• Hard Bake Temp ..
N2 Flow
c8
Spec_ Limit
Control Item
Process
Aligner N2 Flow Rate
Aligner Vacuum
Aligner Air
Aligner Pressure
Aligner Intensity
Coater Soft Bake
Temperature
Vacuum
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Insp_ Frequency
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec .
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
•
•
•
•
•
•
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
31
I
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Process Monitor (Continued)
Control Item
Spec. Limit
Insp. Frequency
Thin Film
• Cooling Water Temp.
• .Thickness
·26±3°C
., Individual Spec.
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
CVD
• Pin Hole
• Thickness
• Individual Spec.
• Individual Spec.
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Diffusion
• Tube Temp.
• C·V Plot Run
Tube
• Sheet Resistance
• Thickness
•
•
•
•
•
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Oncel1Odays
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Process
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Individual
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Spec.
Raw Material Incoming Inspection
1. Mask Inspection
, Defect Detection
Registration
Critical
Dimension
• Pinhole & Clear-extension
• Opaque Projections &
SpOtS
• Scratch/Particle/Stain
• Substrate Crack/Glass·chip
• Others
• Run·out
(X-Y Coordinate)
• Orthogonality
• Drop-in Accuracy
• Die Fit/Rotation
• Critical Dimension
All Masks
.'
• Defect Size::s;1.5,.m
• Defect Density
::s;O.124EA1cm 2
±O.75,.m
20%
'. All New Masks
AI,I Masks
±O.75,.m
±O.50,.m'
±O.50,.m
Purchasing Spec.
• Instrument
• Auto mask Inspection system for defect-detection (NJS 5MD-44)
• Comparator for registration (MVG 7X7)
• Automatic IInewidth measuring system for CD (MPV-CD)
2. Wafer Inspection
Purpose
Insp. Items
Sample
Structural
• Crystal'lographic; Defect
All Lots
• Sirtl Etch
Electrical
• Resistivity
• Conductivity
All Lots
• Monitor Water
Dimensional
•
•
•
•
Thickness
Diameter
Orientation
Flatness
All Lots
TTV, NTV, Epi-thickness
Visual
• Surface Quality
• Cleanliness
Remarlts
TIR (FPD)
Local Slope
All Lots
Purchasing Spec.
• Instrument,
• 4 point probe for resistivity (Kokusai VR40A, Tencor sonogage, ASM 4FPP)
• Flatness measuring system (Siltec)
• Epi. layer thickness gauge (Digilab FTG-12, Qualimatic S-1OO)
• Automatic Surface Insp. System (Aeronca Wis-150)
• Non-contact thickness gauge (ADE6034) ,
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
32
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
In·Process Quality Inspection (FAB)
1. Manufacturing Section
Process Step
Frequency
Process Control Insp.
Oxidation
Oxide Thickness
All Lots
Diffusion
Oxide Thickness
Sheet Resistance
Visual
All Lots
All Lots
All Lots
Photo
Critical Dimension
Visual
Mask Clean Inspection
All Lots (MaS)
All Lots
All Masks with Spot Light (MaS)
or Microscope (BIP)
Etch
Critical Dimension
Visual
All Lots
All Wafers
Thin Film
Metal Thickness
Visual
All Lots
All Lots
Ion Implant
Sheet Resistance
All Lots (Test Wafer)
Low Temp.
Oxide
Thickness
All Lots
Visual
All Lots
E·Test
Electrical
Fab. Out
Visual
~haracteristics
All Lots
All Wafers
2. FAB, QC Monitor/Gate
Process Step
FAB, QC Insp.
Frequency
Oxidation
Oxide Thickness
C·V Test on Tubes
Visual
Once/Shift
Once/10 Days and After CLN
Once/Shift
Diffusion
Oxide Thickness
C·V Test on Tubes
Visual
Once/Shift
Once/10 Days and After CLN
Once/Shift
Photo
Critical Dimension
Visual
Mask CLN Inspection
All Lots (MaS)
Once/Shift
All Masks After 10 Times Use
Etch
Critical Dimension
Visual
All Lots (MaS)
All Lots
Thin Film
C·V Test on Tubes
on Lots
Reflectivity
Once/10 Days and After CLN
Once/Shift
Once/Shift
Low Temp.
Oxide
Refractive Index,
Wt% of Phosphorus
Visual
1 Test Wafer/Lot
1 Test Wafer/Lot
1 Test Wafer/Lot
E·Test
Measuring Data
All Lots
Calibration
Instrument for Thickness
and C.D. Measuring
Once/week
c8.SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
33
.QUALITY and RELIABILITY
3. Photo/Etch process quality control
Process Flow
Process Step
ac Monitor/Gate
Prebake
Oven PM, Temperature
Time
Photo Resist {PRJ
-spin
Thickness Machine PM
Soft Bake
Oven PM, Temperature
Time
Temp. N2 Flow Rate
Align/Expose
Light Uniformity
Alignment, Focus Test
Mask Clean Inspection
Mask Clean Exposure
Light Intensity
Ught Intensity
Mask Clean Insp.
Develop
.
MFG. Control Item
. Equipment PM
Solution Control
Develop
Check
Oven Particle Temp.
N2 Flow Rate
Vacuum
PRIC.D.'S Alignment
Particles
Mask and Resist Defects
QC Inspection
Critical Dimension (CD)
Hard Bake
Oven PM, Temperature
Time
Temp.
N2 Flow Rate
Etch
Etch rate, Equipment
PM & Settings, Etch
Time to Clear
Etchant Temp.
Etch Rate
Inspection
Over/Under
PR Strip
Machine·PM
Final Check
C.D.'S Over and under
Etch, Particles;
PR Residue, Defects,
Scratches
QC Inspection
Same as Final Check,
However, More Intense
on limited Sample
Basis. (AQL 6.5%)
Note: PM represents Preventive Maintenance
4. Reliability·related Interlayer Dielectric, Metallization, and Passivation Process Quality Control Monitor
Item
Wt% Phosphorus Content of the Dielectric Glass
1/Shift
Metallization Interconnect
1/Month
AI Step Coverage
1/Month
Metallization Reflectivity
c8
Frequency
1/Shift
Passivation Thickness and Composition
1/Shift
Thin Film Defect Density
1/Shift
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
34
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Figure 9. General Wafer Fabrication Flow
Process Step
Process Flow
Major Control Item
I
Wafer and Mask
Input
Starting Material
Incoming Inspection
Mask: (See mask Inspection)
Wafer: (See wafer Inspection)
Wafer Sorting and
Labelling·
Resistivity
Initial Oxidation
Oxide Thickness
Photo
• (See manufacturing section)
• (See FAB, QC Monitor/gate)
Inspection
• Critical Dimension
• Visual/Mech - Major: AQL 1.0%
- Minor: AQL 6.5%
QC Gate
• Critical Dimension
Etch
• (See manufacturing section)
• (See FAB, QC Monitor/gate)
Inspection
• Critical Dimension
• Visual/Mech - Major: AQL 1.0%
- Minor: AQL 6.5%
QC.Gate
• Critical Dimension
• Visual/Mech
Diffusion
Metalizatlon
• (See in·process Quality Inspection)
E·test
• Electrical Characteristics
Diff'n
Metal
9
ciS SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
35
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Figure 9. General Wafer Fabrication Flow (Continued)
Process Flow
<>
/
Process Step
Major Control Item
OC Gate
• Electrical Characteristics
Back-Lap
• Thickness
Back Side Evaporation
• Thickness, Time
Evaporation Rate
Final Inspection
• All Wafers Screened
(Visual/Mech)
OC Fab. Final Gate
• Visual/Mech.
- Major: AOL 1.0%
- Minor: AOL 6.5%
'
EDS
(Electrical Die Sorting)
OC Gate
• Function Monitor
Sawing
"
Inspection
• Chip Screen
OC Final Inspection
•
•
•
•
AOL 1.0%
Fab. Defect
Test Defect
Sawing Defect
Die Attach
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
36
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
ASSEMBLY
The process control and inspection points of the assembly operation are explained and listed below:
1. Die Inspection:
Following 100% inspection by manufacturing, in-process Quality Control samples each lot according to internal
or customer specifications and standards.
2. Die Attach Inspection:
Visual inspection of samples is done periodically on a machine/operator basis. Die Attach techniques are monitored
and temperatures are verified.
3. Die Shear Strength:
Following Die Attach, Die Shear Strength testing is performed periodically on a machine/operator basis. Either
manual or automatic die attach is used.
DIE ADHESIVE THICKNESS MONITOR RESULTS. (JEOL SEM, JSM IC845)
4. Wire Bond Inspection:
Visual inspection of samples is complemented by a wire pull test done periodically during each shift. These
checks are also done on a machine/operator basis and XR data is maintained.
5. Pre-SeaIfPre-Encapsulation Inspection:
Following 100% inspection of each lot, samples are taken on a lot acceptance basis and are inspected
according to internal or customer criteria.
WIRE LOOP MONITOR RESULTS.
ciS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
CROSS SECTION INSPECTION FOR BALL BOND.
37
I
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
6. Seal Inspection:
Periodic monitoring of the sealing operation checks the critical temperature profile of the sealing oven for both
glass and metal seals.·
7. Post·Seal Inspection:
Subsequent to a 100% visual inspection, In-Process Quality Control samples each for conformance to visual
criteria.
'
X-RAY MONITOR RESULT.'tPHILIPS MG161)
8. General Assembly Flow is shown in Figure 11.
Sampling Plans
1. Sampling plans are based on an AQL (Acceptable Quality Level) c,oncept and are determined by internal or by
customer specifications.
2. Raw Material Incoming Inspection. (continued)
Material
\
Inspection liem
Lead Frame
1)
2)
3)
4)
Wafer
1) Visual Inspection
AQL 0.65%
1) Visual Inspection
2) Bond Pull Strength Test
3) Bondability Test
n:5, C=O
n: 13, C=O
Critical Defect: 0.65%
Major Defect: 1.0%
Minor Defect: 1.5%
n: 5, C=O
AulAI
Wire
Vjs,ual Inspection
Dimension Inspection
Function Test
Work Test
\
4) Chemical Composition Analysis
1) Visual Inspection.
,2) Moldability Test
Molding Compound
3) Chemical Composition Analysis
c8
Acceptable Quality Level
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
LTPD
LTPD
LTPD
LTPD
10%,
20%,
20%,
20%,
C=2
C=O
C=O
C=O
,
n: 5, C=O
Critical Defect: 0.15%
Major Defect: 1.0%
Minor Defect: 1.5%
n: 5, C=O
38
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
I
MOLDING COMPOUND INCOMING INSPECTION
(THERMAL ANALYSER, DUPONT 9900)
(Continued)
Material
Inspection Item
Visual Inspection
Dimension Inspection
Electro-Static Inspection
Hardness Test
Packing Tube
& Pin
1)
2)
3)
4)
Solder
1) Visual Inspection
2) Weight Inspection
3) Chemical Composition Analysis
LTPD 20% C=O
LTPD 20% C=O
LTPD 20% C=O
Flux
1) Acidity Test
2) Specific Gravity Test
3) Chemical Composition AnalYSis
LTPD 20% C=O
LTPD 20% C=O
LTPD 20% C='U
Solder Preform
1) Visual Inspection
2) Work Test
3) Chemical Composition Analysis'
AOL 1.0%
AOL 1.0%
AOL 1.0%
Coating Resin
1) Visual Inspection
2) Work Test
3) Chemical Composition Analysis
AOL 1.0%
AOL 1.0%
AOL 1.0%
1) Work Test
2) Mark Permanencx Test
Critical Defect: 0.15%
Major Defect: 1.0%
Minor Defect: 1.5%
n: 5, C=O
Chip Carrier
1)
2)
3)
4)
Visual Inspection
Dimension Inspection
Electro-Static Inspection
Hardness Test
LTPD 15% C=2
LTPD 15% C=O
n: 5, C=O
n: 5, C=O
Vinyl Pack
1) Visual Inspection
2) Work Test
3) Electro-Static Inspection
LTPD 20% C=O
LTPD 20% C;=O
LTPD 15% C=O
Ag Epoxy
1) Work Test
2) Chemical Composition Analysis
n:8, C=·O
n:8, C=O
Letter Marking
1) Visual Inspection
2) Work Test
Spare Parts
& Others
1) Dimension Inspection
2) Visual Inspection
Marking Ink
..
c8
Acceptable Quality Level
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
LTPD 15%, C=2
LTPD 15% C=2
n: 5, C=O
n: 5, C=O
n:5, C=O
n:5, C=O
39
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
3. In·Process Quality Inspection'
A. Assembly Lot Acceptance Inspection
(1) Acceptance quality level for wire bond gate inspection
Defect Class
Inspection level
Critical Defect
AQL 0.65%
Major Defect
AQL 1.0%
Minor Defect
AQL 1.5%
Type 01 Defect
- Missing Metal
- Chip Crack '
- No Probe
- Epoxy on Die
- Mixed Device
- Wrong Bond
- Missing Bond
-
Diffusion Defect
Ink Die
Exposed Contact
Bond Short
Die Lift
Broken Wire
-
Metal Missing
Metal Adhesion
Pad Metal Discolored
Tilted Die
Die Orientation
Partial Bond
-
Oxide Defect
Probe Damage
Metal Corrosion
Incomplete Wetting
Weakened Wire
-
Adjacent Die
Passivation Glass
Die Attach Defect
Wire Loop Height
Extra Wire
-
Contamination
Ball Size
Wire Clearance
Bond Deformation
(2) Acceptance quality level for Mold/Trim gate inspection
Defect Class
Inspection Level
Kind of Delect
Critical Defect
AQL 0.15%
-
Incomplete Mold
Void, Broken Package
Misalignment
-
Deformatior)
No Plating
Broken Lead
Major Defect
AQL 0.4%
-
Ejector Pin Defect
Package Burr
Flash on Lead
-
Crack, Lead Burr
Rough Surface
Squashed Lead,
Lead Contamination
Poor Plating
Package Contamination
Bent Lead
AQL 0.65%
-
-
Minor Defect
B. In·process monitor inspection
Inspection Item
Frequency
ReJerence
• Die Shear Test
• Bond Strength Test
• Solderability Test
.' Mark Permanency Test
• Lead Integrity Test
• In·Process Monitor
Inspection for Product
• X·Ray Monitor
Inspection for Molding
• Monitor Inspection
for Production Equipment
Each Lot
Each Lot
Weekly
Weekly
Weekly
4 Times/Shift/Each Process'
MIL·STD·883C, 2019·2
MIL·STD·883C, 20114
MIL·STD·883C, 2003·3
MIL·STD·883C, 2015·4
MIL·STD·883C, 2004·4
Identify for Each -ontrol Limit
2 Times/Shift/Mold Press
Identify for Each Control Limit
2 Times/Shift/Each Unit of
Equipment
Identify for Each Control Limit
cIS
SAMSUNG
~EMICONDUCTOR
40
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
4. Outgoing quality inspection plan (LTPD)
Defect Class
Critical Defect
electrical
visual
Major
Minor
c8
Discrete
LSI
Kind of Defect
1%
2%
Open, short
Wrong configuration, no marking
Defect
electrical
visual
1.5%
3%
Items which affect reliability most strongly
Defect
electrical
visual
2%
5%
Items which minimally or do
not affect rei iabil ity at all
(cosmetic, appearance, etc.)
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
I
41
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Figure 10. \leneral Assembly Flow
Process· Flow
Process Step
Major Control Item
Wafer
Wafer Incoming
Inspection
Q.C. Wafer Incoming Inspection AQL 4_0%
Tape Mount
Sawing Q.C. Monitor
Q.C. Monitoring:
- Chip-out
- Crack
- Sawing-speed
- 0.1. Purity
-
Visual Inspection
100% Screen:
- FAB Defect
- EDS Test Defect
- Sawing & Scratch Defect
Q.C. Gate
1st AQL 1.0%
Reinspection AQL: 0.65%
Scratch
Sawing Discoloration
Cut Count
CO2 Bubble Purity
Lead Frame (UF)
Lead Frame Incoming
R>
~l
c8
*Q.C.UF Incoming Inspection
1. Acceptance Quality Level
- Dimension LTPD 20%, C=O
- Visual & Mechanical: LTPD 10%, C=2
- Functional Work Test: LTPD 10%, (:;=2
Die Attach (D/A)
Q.C. Monitor
*Q.C.D/A Monitor Inspection
1. Bond force
2. Frequency: 4 Times/Station/Shift
3. Sample: 24 ea Time
4. Acceptance Criteria
Defect
Acceptance
Critical
0
Reject
1
Major
1
2
Cure
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
42
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
. Figure 10. General Assembly Flow (Continued)
Process Flow
Process Slep
Q.C. Monitor
<>
Major Conlrol Ilem
I
'Q.C. Cure Monitor Inspection
1. Control Item
- Temperature
- In/out Time
2. Frequency
- 1 Time/Shift
Au Wire
Bonding Wire
Incoming Inspection
r
'Q.C Au Wire Incoming Inspection
1. Visual Inspection: N 5, C = 0
2. Bond Pull Test Strength Test: N = 13, C = 0
3. Bondability Test
- Critical Defect: AQL 0.65%
- Major Defect: AQL 1.0%
- Minor Defect: AQL 1.5%
=
Wire Bonding (W/B)
100% Visual
Inspection
Q.C. Monitor
'Q.C. W/B Monitor Inspection
1. Frequency: 6 Times/Mach/Shift
.Q.C. Gate
1. Q.C. Acceptance Quality Level
- Critical Defect: AQL 0.65%
- Major Defect: AQL 1.0%
- Minor Defect: AQL 1.5%
Mold Compound
Incoming Inspection
Mold
'Moldability Test
- Critical Defect: AQL 0.15%
- Major Defect: AQL 1.0%
- Minor Defect: AQL 1.5%
Mold
Q.C. Monitor
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
'Q.C. Mold Monitor Inspection
1. In·Process Monitor Inspection
- Frequncy: 4 Times/Station/Shift
- Sample: 200 UnitslTime
2. Acceptance Quality Level
- Critical Defect: AQL 0.25%
- Major Defect: AQL 0.4%
43
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Figure 10. General Assembly Flow (Continued)
Process Flow
n
6
6
}-
Process Step
Major. Control Item
Cure
a.c. Monitor
'a.c. Cure Monitor Inspection
1. Control Item
- Temperature
- In/out Time
2. Frequency
- 1 Time/shift
Deflash
a.c. Monitor
'a.c. Deflash Monitor Inspection
1. Control Item
'- Pressure
- Belt Speed
~ Visu"aliMechanical Inspection
2. Frequency: 4 Times/Mach/Shift
3. Identify each Defect Control Limit
TRIM/BEND
a.c. Monitor
'a.c. Trim/Bend Monitor Inspection
1. Visual Inspection
2. Frequency: 4 Times/Station/Shift
Solder
100% Visual Inspection
a.c. Monitor
'a.c. Solder Monitor Inspection
1. Frequency: 4 Times/Mach/Shift
2. Criteria
- Critical Defect: AaL 0.65%
- Major Defect: AaL 1.0%
a.c. Gate
'a.c. Mold Gate
- Acceptance Criteria
Critical Defect: AaL 0.15%
Major Defect: AaL 0.4%
Minor Defect: AaL 0.65%
Test
100% Electrical Test
a.c. Monitor
Correlation Sample Reading for Initial
Device Test
Mark
100% Visual Inspection
I
"91
c8 SAMS~NG
SEMICONDUCTOR
44
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Figure 10. General Assembly Flow (Continued)
Process Flow
0
0
Process Step
PRT Monitoring
(Process Reliability
Testing)
1. PRT
- HOPL (168 HRS), PCT (48 HRS)
- Other (when applicable)
2. Acceptance Criteria: LTPD 10%
Q.C. Monitor
"Q.C. Marking Monitor Inspection
- Frequency: 4 Times/Station/Shift
- Sample: 24 UnitslTime
- Identify for Each C.L.
- Acceptance Criteria
I
I
0
I
I
Major Control Item
Defect
Acceptance
Critical
0
1
Major
1
2
Q.C. Gate
"Q.C. Final Acceptance Level
- Critical Defect: AQL 0.15%
- Major Defect: AQL 0.4%
- Minor Defect: AQL 0.65%
Q.A. Gate
"Q.C. Incoming Inspection
1. Critical Defect:
- Electrical Test: LTPD
- Visual Test:
LTPD
2. Major Defect:
- Electrical Test: LTPD
- Visual Test:
LTPD
3. Minor Defect:
- Electrical Test: LTPD
- Visual Test:
LTPD
Reject
2% (N=116; C=O)
2% (N=116, C=O)
3% (N = 116, C = 1)
3% (N=116, C=1)
5% (N=116, C=2)
5% (N=116, C=2)
Stock
"Age Control
Q.A. Gate
"Q.A. Outgoing Inspection
1. Quantity
2. Customer
3. Packing
4. Sampling Inspection (when applicable) .
- Sampling plan is same as incoming
Inspection
. Shipment
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
45
QUALITY and RELIABILITY·
SST's BEST PROGRAM
The SST Best Program has been designed to offer the customer an alternative to standard off-the-shelf plastic
encapsulated LINEAR circuits. The Best Program will significantly reduce incoming inspection requirements as
well as early device failures (infant mortalify). These results are achieved by a tightened AQL inspection plan and
a burn-in of each unit for 160 + 8, - 0 hours at 125°C or equivalent conditions established from a time/temperature
regression curve. The AQL Plan. Acceptable Quality Levels (AQL) are a measure of the ql\ality of outgoing LINEAR circuits. These
levels are established by the manufacturer to show the process percent defective being produced and to ensure
that the customer is receiving material tl:1at meets his requirements. The SST Best Program has tightened these
AQL levels to a point at which incoming inspection by the customer is no longer a necessity. Best product quality
is monitored significantly more closely than standard product; those lots which fall the AQL level are 100% reworked before resubmission to the AQL gate.
The Reliability Plan. Reliability is the statistical probability that a product will give satisfactory performance for
a specified period of time when used under specified conditions. A typical rate curve is shown below:
INFANT
MORTALITY
w
~
w
a:
::::I
...J
RANDOM FAILURES AT A
LOW CONSTANT FAILURE RATE
~
I
I
o
I
BURNINI
PERIOD I
- OPERATING L l F E - - - -
Reliability theory assumes that devices fail according to the above curve. When a group of devices is manufac·
tured a small portion of the units will be inherently weaker than the average. These weak units will probably fail
during the first few hours of operation-hence the term "infant mortali!y." If the units are burned-in however, thereby
allowing the weak units to fail, there is a much lower probability that those finally put into system use will fail.
The SST Best Row. in order to achieve an extremely high quality unit and reduce infant mortality failures the following
flow has been established:
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
46
QUALITY and RELIABILITY
Process Flow
FLOW CHART
I
I
I
I
1
. 1
I
I
I
I
§
c8
II
DESCRIPTION
I
I
WAFER FABRICATION
LINEAR PROCESS
CV PLOTS
OXIDE THICKNESS MEASUREMENTS
OPTICAL INSPECTIONS
SEM ANALYSIS
ENCAPSULATION
MOLDING COMPOUND ULTRA PURE FOR LINEAR
APPLICATIONS
POST MOLD BAKE
6 HOURS AT 175 DEG. C .
CURES PLASTIC
STRESSES ALL WIRE BONDS AND DIE
O/S FUNCTIONAL ELECTRICAL
100% TESTING
OPENS/SHORTS AND INTERMITTENTS REMOVE
HIGH TEMPERATURE BURN-IN
160 HOURS AT 125 DEG. C. OR EQUIVALENT
CONDITIONS ESTABLISHED FROM A TIME/
TEMPERATURE REGRESSION CURVE. 0.96 eV
FULL FUNCTIONAL AND PARAMETRIC
ELECTRICAL TESTING
100% ELECTRICAL TESTING AC, DC
88 DEG. C.
TIGHT AQL SAMPLING PLAN
ELECTRICAL-0.05% AQL AT 88 DEG. C.
MECHANICAL-O.o1% AQL CRITICAL & MAJOR
SHIP UNITS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDU~R
47
NOTE
LINEAR ICs
FUNCTION GUIDE
1. TELECOMMUNICATION APPLICATION
Application
Tone Ringer
Tone Ringer
with
Bridge
Type
KA241 0
KA2411
tKA2418
Package
8 DIP
8 DIP
Rectifier
KS5808
PULSE Dialer
DTMF/Pulse
Switchable
Dialer
KS5805A/B
Protect against over voltage
Low current consumption
Allow the parallel operation of 4 devices
Built-in hysteresis
External components are minimized
High output voltage
Included bridge diode
16 DIP
16 DIP
Wide operating line voltage and current range
Short start 'up time
External components are minimized
Internal protection of all inputs
18 DIP
KS5805A: Pin 2; Vref
KS5805B: Pin 2; Tone output
RC oscillator used as frequency reference
Pulse output: "0" true,
Mute output: "0" true
tKS58A/B/C/D19
22 DIP
tKS58A/B20
18 DIP
ttKS58A1B/CID21
Adjustable warbling and 2 frequency tone
External triggering or ringer disable (KA2410)
Adjustable supply initiating current (KA2411)
Built-in hysteresis
Direct telephone line operation
Standard 2 of 8 key board use
Tone output: Bipolar output
Mute output: N-CH open drain
DTMF Dialer
tKA2413
Circuit Function
22 DIP
Tone/pulse switchable dialing, touch key or slide switch
32 digit redialing & PABX auto pause time
Make/break ratio pin selectable
KS5821 (Telephone lock function)
t New Product
tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
51
LINEAR ICs
FUNCTION GUIDE
TELECOMMUNICATION APPLICATION
Application
DTMF/Pulse
Switchable
with 10 No.
Memory
Speech Network
Low Voltage
Speech Network
with Dialer Interface
Tone, Decoder
Type
Package
Circuit Function
18 DIP
10 No. x 18 digit memory including a redial memory
Including PABX auto pause time
10 pps/20 pps pin selectable
Make/break ratio: 40%/60%
14 Dip
Transmit/Receiver amplifier
Side tone control
On chip regulator
tKA2425A/B
18 DIP
Low Voltage Operation (1.5V)
Tx, Rx & side tone gain set by external resistors
Loop length equalization for Tx, Rx & sidetone
Provides regulated voltage for CMOS dialer
DTMF level adjustable with a singre resistor
A: Mute active low B: Mute active high
LM567C/L
8 DIP
8 SOP
Touch tone decoding
Sequential tone decoding
Commu"nication paging'
High stable center frequency
LM567L: Micropower (4mW at 5V) dissipation
16 DIP
16 SOP
Small current dissipation (Typ. 3.5mA: Vee 4.0V)
Excellent input sensitivity
Minimum number of external parts required
Used to cordless telephone parts required
Work from 1.8V to 7.0V
ttKS5823
KA2412A
"
FM IF Amplifier
(Continued)
MC3361
,
w255 companding law
wLaw Codec
Codec Filter
wLaw Combo
Codec
tKT5116J
16 DIP
tKT3040J
16 DIP
ttKT3054J
16 DIP
ttKT3064J
20 DIP
± 5V operation
Synchronous or Asynchronous'operation
On-chip sample and hold.
Exceeds' all D3/D4 and CCITT spec.
± 5V operation
Law power consumption
20dB gain adjust range
Sin X/X correction in receive filter
TTL and CMOS compatible logic
Exceeds all 03/04 and CCITT spec.
Complete CODEC and filtering system including
± 5V operation
Low power consumption
TTL and CMOS compatible logic
Receive push-pull power amp (KT3064)
t New Product
tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
52
LINEAR ICs
FUNCTION GUIDE
TELECOMMUNICATION APPLICATION
Application
Line Driver
Li ne Receiver
Fluorescent
Display Driver
8-Channel
Source Driver
Universial
Asynchronous
Receiver and
Transmitter (UART)
Type
MC1488
MC1489/A
(Continued)
Package
Circuit Function
14 DIP
14 SOP
Conformance EIA standard No. RS-232C & V28 (CCITI)
Quad line driver
Interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and
data communication equipment (DCE)
Current limited output: ± 10mA typo
Power-off source impedance 300 ohms min.
Compatible with DTL and TTL, HCTLS families
Flexible operating supply range
14 DIP
14 SOP
Conformance EIA standard No. RS-232C & V-28 (CCITI)
Quad line receiver
Interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and
data communication equipment (DCE)
Input signal range ± 30 volts
Input threshold hysteresis built in
Response control
a) Logic threshold shifting
b) Input noise filtering
18 DIP
Consisting of 8 NPN darlington output stages and
associated common-emitter input stages
Digit or segment drivers
Low input current, internal output pull-down resistors
High output breakdown voltage
Single or split supply operation
KA2580A
18 DIP
TTL, CMOS, PMOS, NMOS compatible
High output current ratings
Internal transient suppression
Efficient input/output pin structure
Low voltage LEDs and incandescent lamp
KA2588A
20 DIP
ttKA2651
ttKS5824
tKS5812
24 DIP
4n DIP
KA2588A: Separated logic and driver supply line
The data formatting and control to interface serial
asynchromous data communications between main
system and subsystems.
Low power, high speed CMOS process
Serial/parallel conversi?n of data 8 and 9 bit
transmission
Programmable control register
Optional .,. 1, .,. 16, and .,. 64 clock modes
Peripheral/modem control functions
Double buffered
Included 4 UART in one chip (KS5812)
t New Product
tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
53
LINEAR ICs
FUNCTION GUIDE
2. VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. 3-Tenninal Fixed Positive Voltage Regulator
- Type
Function
High output. MC78XX
Current
series
(lo =1A)
Medium·
output
current
(/s=500mA)
MC78MXXC
AC Series
Low
Output
Current
(l o =100mA)
3A Output
Current
MC78LXXAC
series
tKA78TXX
Series
3A, 5V
Positive
Regulator
B.
3~Tenninal
Function
High output
Current
(/0=1A)
LM323
Package
Application
Features
TO-220
Maximum output current 1A
5V, 6V, 8V, 8.5V, 9V, 10V
External components are minimized
11V, 12V, 15V, 18V
Internal protection circuit fo~ output short and 24V fixed
output voltage
Positive voltage regulator
Variable application control
TO-220
5", 6V, 8V, 10V,
Maximum output current 500mA
Extemal c.omponen-ts are minimized
12V, 15V, 18V
Internal protection circuit for output short and 24V fixed
_POSitive voltage ;egulator
output voltage
Variable application circuit
TO-92
Output current in excess of 100mA
External componerit minimized
Internal protection circuit for
output short .
Positive voltage .regulator
Variable application circuit
TO-220
Maximum output. current 3A
5V, 6V, 8V, 12V
No external components required
15V, 18V, 24VInternal protection circuit for output short fixed output
Power dissipation: 25W
voltage
TO-39
Maximum output current 3A
Intemal current and thermal limiting.
Positive voltage regulator
2.6V, 5V, 6.2V;
8V, 8.2V, 9V, 12V,
15V, 18V arid 24V
fixed output
voltage
5V
Fixed Negative Voltage Regulator
Type
MC79XXC
series
Package
Application
Features
TO-220
TO:220
Oiltput't:urrent in excess of 500mA
Internal overload protection Internal short circuit current
limiting
-2V, -5V, -6V, -8V,
-10V, -12V, -15V,
-18V and 24V fixed
output voltage -
TO-92
Output current In excess of 100mA
Internal short circuit current limiting
External component minimized
-5V, -12V, -15V,
-18V and - 24V fixed
output voltage
,
Medium
Output
Current
(10 = 500mA)
MC79MXXC
Series
Low Output
ttMC79LXXAC
Current
(/0=100mA)
-2V, -5V, -6V,
-8V, -10V, -12V,
-15V, -18V, and
-24V, fixed
output voltage
Output current in excess of 1A .
Internal thermal overload protection
Internal short circuit current
limiting
- t New Product
. tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR:
~4
LINEAR ICs
FUNCTION GUIDE
C. Precision Voltage Regulator
Function
Type
Package
Application
Features
Precision
Regulator
LM723
14 DIP
Positive or negative supply operation
Output voltage
Series, shunt, switching or floating
adiustable
operation
from 2 to 37V
0.01 % line and load regulation
Output current to 150mA without external
pass transistor
33V
Regulator
KA33V
ITO-92
Low temperature coefficient
Low dymic resistance
Electronic tuning
system
Output current in excess of 1.5A
Output adjustable from 1.2V to 37V
Internal short circuit current limiting
Floating operation for
high voltage operation
Eliminates stocking
many fixed voltage
ttLM317
Adjustable
Regulator
ttKA337
ttKA350
TO-220
TO-220
TO-3P
,
Adjustable 3-terminal negative
vqltage regulator
Line regulation typically 0.01 %/V
Load regulation typically 0.3%
Internal thermal overload protection
1.5A output current
Output voltage
adjustable from
-1.2V to -37V
Adjustable 3-terminal positive
voltage regulator
3A output current
Guaranteed, thermal regulation
Output voltage
adjustable from
1.2V to 25V
I
D. Switching Voltage Regulator
Function
Type
Package
Adjustable
1.25V'to
40V
KA78S40
16 DIP
tt16 SOP
PWM
100KHz
tKA3524
16 DIP
Features
Peak output current of 1.5A
without ex~ernal transistor
BOdB line and load regulation
, Operation from 2.5V to 40V
PWM power control circuitry
Frequency adjustable to greater than
100KHz
Total supply current is less than 10mA
Single ended or push·pull output
Application
Step-down converter
Step-up converter
Inverter
Switching regulator
Trans DC-DC converter
Inverting v~ltage
regulator
.
3 PRECISION VOLTAGE REFERENCE
Function
Type
Package
' Features
Programmable output voltage from
Vref to 36V
Voltage reference tolerance: ± 1.0%
Low output noise voltage
Switching regulator
Constant current
source
Constant current sink
Application'
Adjustable
Reference
KA431
TO-92
t8 DIP
t8 SOP,
5V
Reference
tKA336
TO-92
Adjustable 4V to 6V
Low temperature coefficient
0.60 dynamic impedance
Fast Turn-on
Adjustable shunt
regulator
Precision power
regulator
1.235V
Reference
KA385
TO·92
Low temperature coefficient
operating current of 10ILA to 20mA
10 dynamic impedance
Micropower
reference
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
5,5
LINEAR ICs
FUNCTION GUIDE
4. OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
Function
Type
•
Comparator, DC amp,
Multivibrator, 'Summing
amp, Integrator or differentiator Narrow band or BPF
8 DIP
8 SOP
Slew·rate of 10V/p,s as a summing
amplifier
External frequency compensation
Variable capacitance
Multiplier
Sine wave oscillator
ttKF351
8 DIP
8 SOP
JFET input
Low input bias current
High slew rate 13V/p,s
Wide gain bandwidth
High speed intergrators
Fast D/A converters
Sample arid hold c1rcuits
KA733
14 DIP
14 SOP
120MHz band width
Selectable gains of 10, 100, 400
No frequency compansation
Disk file memories
Magnetic tape systems
Wide band video amplifiers
MC4558
MC1458
8 DIP
8 SOP
Internal frequency compensation
Low noise operation
Phone pre-amplifier
Tape playback amplifier
Schmitt trigger,
OPAMP
LM358/A
LM258/A
LM2904
tKA9256
Quad
OPAMP
t
tt
Application
Internal frequency compensation
Short circuit protection
KA301A
Dual
OPAMP
Features
8 DIP
8 SOP
LM741
r·
Package
8 DIP
t8 SOP
Internal frequency compensation
for unit gain
Large DC voltage gain
Wide power supply range
Internal current limiting: Isc = 350mA
. 10 SIP HIS Internal frequency compensation
Minimal cross over distortion'
DC summing amplifier
Power amplification
RC active bandpass filter
Compatible with all forms
of logic
High power amplifier
CD driver
LM324/A
LM224/A
LM2902
14 DIP.
14 SOP
Internal frequency compensation
Wide supply voltage range
Single supply: DC 3V - 30V
Dual .supply: DC ± 1.5V - ± 15V
Audio power booster
DC amp, Multivibrator
Switch, Comparator
Schmitt trigger
LM348
LM248
14 DIP
14 SOP
Each amplifier is functionally
equivalent to the LM741
Pin compatible with LM324
Short circuit protection
Comparator with
hysteresis
Voltage reference
MC3403
tMC3303
14 DIP
14 SOP
Class AB output stage for minimal
crossover distortion
Single or split supply operation
Internal frequency compensation
Comparator with
hysteresis
Bi-Quad filter
New Product
Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
56
FUNCTION GUIDE
LINEAR ICs
5. VOLTAGE COMPARATOR
Function
Type
ILM311
tLM211
Single
Comparator
ttKA361
ttKA261
KA710C
Dual
Comparato"r
LM393/A
LM2903
LM293
KA319
KA219
Quad
Comparator
LM339/A
LM2901
LM239
LM3302
Package
Features
Application
8 DIP
t8 SOP
Operates from single 5V supply
Maximum input current: 250nA
Maximum offset current: 50nA
Differential input voltage range: ± 30V
Power consumption: 135mW at + 15V
Multivibrator output is
compatible with DTL and
as well as MOS circuits
voltage controlled
oscillator
14 DIP
independent strobes
Guaranteed high speed: 20nS max.
Complementary TTL outputs
High speed analog
to digital converter
Zero-crossi ng detectors
Low offset and thermal drift
Compatible with practically
all types of integrated logic
Interface between
logic types
Level detector
with lamp
14 DIP
t14 SOP
8 DIP
8 SOP
14 DIP
t14 SOP
14 DIP
14 SOP
High precision comparators
Reduced Vos drift over temperature
Eliminates need for dual supply
Allows sensing near ground
Compatible with all forms of logic
Power drain suitable for battery
operation
Low input biasing current: 25nA
Low output saturation voltage 250mV
at 4mA
Output voltage compatible
with TTL, DTL, ECL and
CMOS logic system
Basic comparator
Pulse generator
MOS clock driver
Two indepentent comparators
Operates from a single 5V
High common mode slew rate
Relay driver
Window detector
Wide single supply voltage
range or dual supplies
Very low supply current drain
(0.8mA)-independent of supply
voltage (2mW/Comparator at + 5V DC)
Low input biasing current: 25nA
Input common-mode voltage range
includes GND
Low output saturation volti!lge 250mV
at 4mA
Compatible with all forms
of logic
Bi-stable multivibrator
One-shot multivibrator
Time deiilY generator
Square wave oscillator
Pulse generator
Limit comparator
Crystal controlled
oscillatgor
t New Product
tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
57
II
LINEAR ICs
FUNCTION GUIDE
6. TIMER
Func;tlon
Single
Timer
Dual
Timer
Quad
Timer
Type
Package
NE555
8 DIP
t8 SOP
Maximum operating
frequency: 500KHz
Adjustable ~uty cycle
KS555
tKS555H
8 DIP
t8S0P
Low power consumption by using
CMOS process
High speed operation
Wide operation supply voltage:
2 to 18 volts
Pin compatible. with NE555
NE556
14 DIP
t14 SOP
TTL Compatible
Dual NE555
Time delay generation
14 DIP
t14 SOP
Low· power consumption
by using C-MOS process
Pin compatible with NE556
Time delay' generation
tKS556
tNE558
16 DIP
Wide supply voltage range:
4.5 to·.16V
100mA output current per section
Time period equal RC
Quad monostable
Sequential timing
Precision timing
Features
Application
PreCision timing
Pulse generator
Precision timing
Pulse generator
7. DATA CONVERTER les
Functions
A/D,D/A
Converter
Type
Package
tKSV3100A
40 DIP
High speed 8-bit AID and 10-bit D/A
Image processing
converter on the single chip construction Video/Graphics
ttKSV311Q
40 DIP
Enhanced version of KSV3100A
ttKSV3208
28. DIP
High speed 8,bit AID converter
28 DIP
8-bit I'P-compatible AID converter with
8-channel multiplexer linearity error
KAD0808: ± 1/2 LSB
KAD0809: ± 1 LSB
tKAD0808/9
AID
Converter
ttKAD0820AiB
DMM A/D
tKS7126
S.A.A.
c8
Image processing
Video/G raphics
General purpose and
I'P-interface system
8 bit I'P-conipatible AID converter with
Track/Hold function linearity
KAD0820A: ± 1/2 LSB
KAD0820B: ± 1 LSB
40 DIP
3-1/2 digit LCD driver AID converter
Digital multi-meter
High speed quad 4-bit DIA converter
Video/Graphics
General purpose and
I'P-interface system
ttKDAOadO
16 DIP
8-bit D/A converter
ttKDA0808
16 DIP
8-bit D/A converter
ttKS25C02
ttKS25C03
16 DIP
8-bit CMOS successilie
registers
ttKS25C04
24 SDIP
12-bit CMOS successive approximation
registers
t New Product
Applications
20 DIP
ttKSV3404
D/A
Converter
Features
app~oximation
SAR of AID converter
tt Under Development
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUcroR
58
FUNCTION GUIDE.
LINEAR ICs
8. MISCELLANEOUS ICs
Function
Toy Radio
Control
Actuator
DC Motor
Speed
Controller
Earth
Leakage
Detector
Zero
Voltage
Switch
Type
Package
KA2303
9SIP
tKA2304
9SIP
Features
Application
High gain amplifier, Peak detector, 3 Function
T flip-flop, comparator with
hysteresis, regulator, motor driver 2 Function
ttKA2307
16 DIP
Receiver
5 Function
ttKA2308
14 DIP
Transmitter
5 Function
KA2401
8 DIP
KA2404
TO-92L
Stable voltage reference
VreI = 1.27V (Typ.)
Vcc =4-12V
KA2402
8 DIP
Stable current source
Vcc =1.8-8V
Stable voltage reference
VreI = 1.0V (Typ.)
Vee = 3.5-14.4V
I
tKA2407
TO-126
KA2803
8 DIP
Low power consumption
High noise immunity
Few external components
Earth leakage detector
8 DIP
Easy operation either through
the AC line or a DC supply
Supply. voltage control
External component are
minimized
Negative output current pulse up
to 250mA (short circuit protection)
ON, OFF temperature control
Time proportional
temperature control
KA2804
t New Product
tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
59
CROSS REFERENCE GUIDE
LINEAR ICs
1; TELECOMMUNICATION ICs
A. Dialer
Application
Pulse Dialer
DTMF Dialer
UMC
SHARP
SAMSUNG
MOSTEK
KS5805A
KS5805B
*MK50992
*MK50993
·S2560A/B
*T40992
*T40993
*LR40992
*LA40993
KS5808
KA2413
'MK5089
*PBD3535
(RIFA)
'S25089
'UM95089
UM95087
'LA4089
LA4087
AMI
Othel'$
'SBA5089
SBA5091
SBA5099
MK5370
*UM91230
'UM91210
LR48081
LR48082
*S7230A/B
• LC7360
ttKS5823
. MK5380
MK5375/6
UM91250
UM91260
LR4803
PCD3315
SAMSUNG
MOTOROLA
MITEL
CHERRY
Tone/Pulse
Switchable with
Redial Memory
tKS5819
tKS5820
ttKS5821
Tone/Pulse
Switch able with
10 No. Memory
B. Tone Ringer
Application
Tone Ringer
1 Chip Tone Ringer
C.~peech
SGS
Others
KA241 0
*ML8204
'CS8204
*TA31001
KA2411
'ML8205
*CS8205
*TA31002
Others
tKA2418
MC34012/7
• LS1240
Network
Application
SAMSUNG
SGS
RIFA
ITT
ERSO
Subset Amplifier
KA2412A
Speech Network
with Dialer
Interface
tKA2425A
tKA2425B
• LS285/A
PBL3726
TEA1045
*CIC9185
LS356
PBL3781
*MC34014
(MOTOROLA)
D. Tone Decoder
Application
Tone Decoder
SAMSUNG
NATIONAL
SHARP
SIGNETICS
Others
LM567
*LM567
*IR3N05
'NE567
*XR567 (EXAR)
LM567L
*XAL567 (EXAR)
t New Product
tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
60
LINEAR ICs
CROSS REFERENCE GUIDE
E. FM IF Amplifier
Application
SAMSUNG
MOTOROLA
SHARP
SPRAGUE
Others
FM IF Amplifier
MC3361
" MC3361
IR3N06
ULN3859
"LM3361
I
F. Codec, Codec Filter, Combo Codec
Application
SAMSUNG
. wLaw Codec
tKT5116J
Codec Filter
N/S
FAIRCHILD
SGS
*TP5116
*/LA5116
*M5116
2910
*/LA5912
*M5912
*2912
Others
tKT3040J
*TP3040
wLaw Combo Codec
ttKT3064J
*TP3064
2913
wLaw Combo Codec
ttKT3054J
" TP3054
*2916
*MK5116
*ETC5040
MC14400·5
*ETC5064
EXAR
SIGNETICS
G. Interfaces
Application
Line Driver
Line Receiver
SAMSUNG
MOTOROLA
FAIRCHILD
TI
N/S
MC1488
*MC1488
*/LA1488
"SN75188
*DS1488
*XR1488
*MC1488
MC1489
*MC1489
*/LA1489
*SN75189
*DS1489
XR1489
*MC1489
MC1489A
* MC1489A
*/LA1489A
* DS1489A
*XR1489A
*SN75189A
* MC1489A
H. Driver
. Application
Fluorescent Display Driver
8CH Source Driver
SAMSUNG
ttKA2651
Others
SPRAGUE
*UCN5815A
KA2580A
*UDN2580A
KA2588A
*UDN2588A
I. UART
Application
_ Single UART
Quad UART
SAMSUNG
ttKS5824
HITACHI
. *HD6350
MOTOROLA
Others
* MC6850
tKS5812
t New Product
tt Under Development
* Direct Replacement
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
61
CROSS REFERENCE GUIDE
LINEAR ICs
2. VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. 3-Terminal Fixed Positive Voltage Regulator
Description
MC78XXAC/C
Series
(lo=1A)
MC78MXXC
Series
(lo=0.5A)
MC78LXXAC
(lo=0.1A)
SAMSUNG
FAIRCHILD
MC7805AC/C
MC7806AC/C
MC7808AC/C
MC7885AC/C
MC7809AC/C
MC7810AC/C
MC7Q11AC/C
MC7812AC/C
MC7815AC/C
MC7818AC/C
MC7824AC/C .
MC7805AC/C
MC7806AC/C
MC7808AC/C
I'A7805
I'A7806
I'A7808
I'A7885
MC7812AC/C
MC7815AC/C
MC7818AC/C
MC7824AC/C
,.A7812
I'A7815
I'A7818
I'A7824
I'PC7812
I'PC7815
I'PC7818
I'PC7824
MC78M05C
MC78M06C
MC78M08C
MC78M10C
MC78M12C
MC78M15C
MC78M18C
MC78M24C
MC78M05C
MC78M06C
MC78M08C
,.A78M05C
I'A78M06C
I'A78M08C
I'PC78M05
MC78M12C
MC78M15C
MC78M18C
MC78M24C
,.A78M12C
,.A78M15C
MC78L05AC
I'A78L05AC
I'A78L62AC
MC78L26AC
MC78L05AC
MC78L62AC
MC78L08AC
MC78L82AC
MC78L09AC
MC78L12AC
MC78L15AC
MC78L18AC
I'PC7808
Package
AN7805
AN7806
AN7808
I'A78M24
I'PC78M08
I'PC78M10
I'PC78M12
I'PC78M15
I'PC78M18
I'PC78M24
AN7812
. AN7815
AN7818
AN 7824
AN 78M05
AN78M06
AN78M08
AN78M10
AN78M12
AN38M15
AN78M18
AN78M24
TO-22O
MC78L05AC
~C78L24AC'
KA78TXXAC/C
Series
(10 = 3A)
KA78T05AC/C
KA78T06C
.KA78TOBC
KA78T12AC/C
KA78T15AClC
KA78T18C
KA78T24C
MC78T05AClC
MC78T06C
MC78T08C
MC78T12AC/C
MC78T15AC/C
MC78T18C
MC78T24C
LM323
(10 3A)
LM323
(TO-3P)
LM323
(T0-3/T0-220)
c8
I'PC7805
MATSUSHITA
T0-22O
MC78L12AC
MC78L15AC
MC78L18AC
MC7.8L24AC
=
NEC
MOTOROLA
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
I'A78L82AC
I'A78L09AC
,.A78L12AC
I'A78L15AC
TO-92
TO-220
SH323
(TO-3)
62
LINEAR ICs
CROSS REFERENCE GUIDE
B. 3·Terminal Fixed Negative Voltage Regulator
Description
SAMSUNG
MC79XXC
Series
(10= 1A)
MC7902C
MC7905C
MC7906C
MC7908C
MC7910C
MC7912C
MC7915C
MC7918C
MC7924C
MC79MXXC
(l o =0.5A)
MC79M02C
MC79M05C
MC79M06C
MC79M08C
MC79M10C
MC79M12C
MC79M15L
MC79M18C
MC79M24C
ttMC79LXXAC
(l o =0.1A)
MC79L05AC
MC79L12AC
MC79L15AC
MC79L18AC
MC79L24AC
MOTOROLA
FAIRCHILD
MC7905C
MC7906C
MC7908C
,.A7905·
,.PC7905
,.A7908
,.PC7908
AN7905
AN7906
AN7908
MC7912C
MC7915C
MC7918C
MC7924C
,.A7912
,.A7915
,.PC79t2
,.PC7915
,.PC7918
,.PC7924
AN7912
AN7915
AN7918
AN 7924
MC79M05C
,.A79M05
NEC
MATSUSHITA
Package
·TO-220.
,.A79M08
TO-22O
MC79M12
MC79M15
,.A79M12
,.A79M15
MC79L05AC
MC79L12AC
MC79L15AC
MC79L18AC
MC79L24AC
TO-92
c. Precision Voltage Regulator
Description
Adjustable
Voltage
Adjustable
Voltage
SAMSUNG
MOTOROLA
FAIRCHILD
N/S
NEC
Package
MC1723
p.A723
LM723
14 DIP
ttLM317
LM317
,.A317
LM317
TO-220
ttKA337
LM337
LM337
LM337
TO-220
ttKA350
LM350
LM350
LM350
TO-220
,.PC574
TO-92
LM723
33V Regulator
KA33V
D•.Switching Voltage Regulator
Qescription
Adjustable
1.25V to 40V
(fo = 100KHz)
PWM 100KHz
SAMSUNG
,.A78S40
MOTOROLA
FAIRCHILD
,.A78S40
,.A78S40
tKA3524
N/S
TI
Package
16 DIP
LM3524
SG3524
16 DIP.
t New Product
tt Under Development
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
63
II
CROSS REFERENCE GUIDE
LINEAR ICs
3~_
PRECISION VOLTAGE REFERENCE
Description
Adjustable
Reference
(2.5V-36V)
5V Reference-· 1.235V
Reference
SAM$UNG
KA431
MOTOROLA
FAIRCHILD
TL431
",A431
tKA336
ttKA385
LM385
TI
N/S
TL431
Package
TO-92
t8 DIP
t8 SOP
LM336
TO-92
LM385
TO-92
4. OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
Description
SAMSUNG
MOTOROLA
NATIONAL
Single OP Amp
LM741
KA301/A
KA733C
ttKF351
MC1741
LM301/A
MC1733C
LF351
LM741 LM301/A
LM733C
LF351
LM358/A
LM258JA
LM2904
MC1458
MC4558
tKA9256
LM358JA
L.M258
LM2904
MC1458
MC4558
LM358JA
LM258JA
LM2904
LM1458
lM324JA
lM224JA
LM2902
lM348
LM248
MC3403
ttMC3303
LM324JA
LM224
lM2902
lM348
LM248
MC3403
MC3303
lM324JA
lM224JA
lM2902
LM348
lM248
Dual OP Amp
Quad OP Amp
FAIRCHILD
MATSUSHITA
",A741
",A301/A
-",A733C
,..A1458
",A4558
,..A324
",A224
",A2902
,..A348
,..A248
,..A3403
,..A3303
Others
",PC301C
AN6562
TA75358
AN4558
NJM4558
"TA7256
AN6564
TA75324
NJM3403A
5. VOLTAGE COMPARATOR
Description
SAMSUNG
MOTOROLA
NATIONAL
FAIRCHILD
LM311
LM211
lM311
LM211
lM361
LM261
LM710
LM311
LM311
LM211
Single Comparator
lM311
LM211
tKA361
ttKA261
tKA7.10C
,..A710C
JZA710C
Dual Comparator
LM393JA
LM2903
lM293
KA319
ttKA219
LM393JA
LM2903
lM293
LM393JA
LM2903
LM293
LM319
LM219
LM339JA
LM2901
lM239
LM3302
lM339JA
LM2901
LM239
Quad Comparator-
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
LM339JA
LM2901
LM239
LM3302
,..A339
",A2901
",A239
,..A3302
TI
Others
LM311
lM393JA
lM2903
LM293
LM319
LM219
TA75393
AN6914
LM339
LM2901
LM239
LM3302
TA75339
AN6912
NJM319
64
CROSS REFERENCE GUIDE
LINEAR ICs
6. TIMER
Description
SAMSUNG
NE555
tKS555H
KS555
Single Timer
Dual Timer
NE556
tKS556
Quad Timer
tNE558
TI
MOTOROLA
NATIONAL
SIGNETICS
MC1455
LM555
NE555
NE555
TLC555
LM556
NE556
NE556
TLC556
Others
TA75555
ICM7555
ICM7556
I
NE558
7. DATA CONVERTER ICs
Application
SAMSUNG
NATIONAL
TI
INTERSIL
ITT
UVC31 00
UVC3100
tKSV3100A
A/D·D/A Converter
KSV3100A
up·date version
ttKSV3110
High-Speed 8·Bit AID
8·Bit AID Converter
ttKSV3208
tKAD0808l9 A DC0808/9
ttKAD0820
ADC0808J9
ADC82A
ADC0820
TSC7126
ICL7126
KS7126
3·1/2 DMM AID
4·Bit Triple
D/A Converter
Others
ttKSV3404
8·Blt D/A Converter
SAR.
ttKDA0800
DAC0800
ttKDA0808
DAC0808
ttKS25C02
OM 2502
ttKS2503
DM2503
ttKS2504
DM2004
DAC82
DAC08
MC1408
AD1408
8. MISCELLANEOUS ICs
Application
SAMSUNG
Toy Radio
Control Actuator
SEGNETICS NATIONAL MITSUBISHI
NEC
KA2303
3 Function
tKA2304
2 Function
5 Function .(RX)
ttKA2307
5 Function (TX)
ttKA2308
KA2401
DC Motor Speed
Controller
AN6612
KA2404
AN6610
ttKA2407
*AN6651
KA2803
Zero Voltage SW
KA2804
c8
",PC1470H
tKA2402
Earth Leakage
Detector"
t New Product
Others
tt Under Development
LM1851
*LA5521D
",PC147QH
·M54123
A7390
*",PC1701C
* Direct Replacement
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
65
LINEAR ICs
3100A
KSV
ORDERING INFORMATION
C
N
A+
T
~
BURN-IN (OPTIONAL)
(SEE BURN-IN PR~GRAM) .
PACKAGE TVP,E
L-----------------TEMPERATURERANGE
'---------------------------DEVICE NUMBER AND SUFFI~ (OPTIONAL)
A: IMPROVED VERSION
'------------------------------------ DEVICE FAMILY
TEMPERATURE RANGE
BLANK
SEE INDIVJDUAL S'PEC
PACKAGE TYPE
CODE
C
COMMERCIAL 0 - + 70°C
D
I
INDUSTRIAL - 25 - + 85°C
-40-+!WC
N
M
MILITARY -55 -+125°C
J
S
0
E
B
P
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA
LINEAR IC
KS
CMOS IC
KT
TELECOM IC
LM
NATIONAL
MC
MOTOROLA
NE
S[GNETICS
KSV
A/D-DIA CONVERTER
KAD
AID CONVERTER
KDA
D/A CONVERTER
c8
SAMSUNG. SEMICONDUCTO~
W
U
L
PL
M
H
Z
V
A
T
X
G
PKG.TYPE
SOIC
CERAMIC DIP
PLASTIC DIP (300/600 mil)
SIP
FOP
SD (400 mil)
SSD (Skinny Shrink DIP)
(400 mil. Small Pitch)
SHD (Shrink DIP)
(300 mil. Small Pitch)
ZIP
PGA
LCC
PLCC
TO-3
TO-3P
TO-92
TO-92L
TO-126
TO-220
TO-247
BARE CHIP
66
,/
"~t,:;,?'hl~rP\i~~0~ :~,"/;; ,
ft
PRODUCT INDEX
(Continued)
3. Telecommunication Application
Device
KA2410
KA2411
. KA2412A
KA2413
KA2418
KA2419
KA2425A1B
KS5805A1B
KS5808
KS5812
KS5819
KS5820
KS5821
KS5824
KT3040J
KT3054J
KT3064J
KT5116J
LM587C
LM587L
MC1488
MC1489/A
MC3361
KA2580A
KA2588A
KA2651
Function
Tone Ringer
Tone Ringer
Telephone Speech ·Circuits
Dual Tone Multi Freque~cy Generator
Tone Ringer with Bridge Diode
Tone Ringer with Bridge Diode
Telephone Speech Network with Dialer Interface
Telephone Pulse Dialer with Redial
Dual Tone Multi Frequency Dialer
Quad Universial Asychronous Receiver and Transmitter
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Tone/Pulse Dialer with Redial
Universial Asychronous Receiver and Transmitter
PCM Monolithic Filter
COMBO CODEC
COMBO CODEC
,...Law Companding CQDEC
Tone Decoder
Micropower Tone Decoder
Quad Line Driver
Quad Line Receiver
. Low Power Narrow Band FM IF
8-Channel Source Drivers
8-Channel Source Drivers
Fluorescent Display Drivers
Package
8 DIP
8 DIP
14 DIP
16 DIP
8 DIP
8 DIP
18 DIp·
18 DIP
16 DIP
40 DIP
22 DIP/SDIP
18 DIP
22 DIP/SDIP .
24 DIP
16 CERDIP
16 CERDIP
20 CERDIP
16 CERDIP
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
16 DIP/16 SOP
18 DIP
20 DIP
18 DIP
Page
69
69
75
83
108
108
112
130
146
152
162
172
162
. 180
191
200
214
226
239
247
257
264
270
599
599
604
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA24101KA2411
TONE RINGER
The KA2410iKA2411 is a bipolar integrated circuit designed for telephone
bell replacement.
8 DIP
.FUNCTIONS
• Two oscillators
• Output amplifier
• Power supply control circuit
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Designed for telephone bell replacement
Low current drain.
Small size 'MINI DIP' package.
Adjustable 2-frequency tone.
Adjustable _rbling rate. •
Built-In hysteresis prevents false triggering and rotary dial
'CHIRPS'
Extension tone ringer modules
Alarms or other alerting devices.
External triggering or ringer disable (KA2410).
Adjustable for reduced supply initiation current (KA2411)
•
•
•
•
APPLICATION CIRCUIT 1·(KA2410)
o--t bC:T'1."".,.,..---,
.
O.9~F
100K-200K ohm
C.
22,.FI35V
R2
165K±1%
C2
o.47pF±5%
Note: 1. Output amplifier
2. High frequency oscillator.
3. Low frequency oscillator
4. Hysteresis regulator
Fig. 1
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
69
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2410/KA2411
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta
Characteristic
Supply Voltage
Power Dissipation
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
=25°C)
Symbol'
Value
Unit
V
30
400
-45 to 65
-65to 150
Vee
Po
Top'
TS!lI
rrm
°C
DC·
=
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ta 25°C)
(All voltage referenced to GND unless otherwise specified)
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
29.0
V
Operating Supply Voltage
Vee
Initiation Supply Voltage l
VSI
See Fig. 2
17
19
21
V
Initiation Supply Current l
lSI
KA2411-6.8K-Pin 2 to GND
1.4
2.5
4.2
mA
Sustaining Voltage2
Vsus
See Fig. 2
9.7
11.0
12.0
V
Sustaining Current2
Isus
No Load Vee=Vsus, See Fig. 2
0.7
1.4
2.5
mA
Trigger Voltage3
VTA
KA2410 Only Vee =15V
9.0
Trigger Current3
ITA
KA24100nly
Disable Voltage'
VDlS
KA24100nly
Disable Current'
lOIs
KA24100nly
-40
-50
Output Voltage High
VOH
Vee=21V, la=-15mA
Pin 6=6V, Pin 7=GND
17.0
19.0
Output Voltage LOw
VOl
Vee=21V,la=15mA
Pin 6=GND, p'in 7=6V
liN (Pin 3)
liN (Pin 7)
High Frequency 1
High Frequency 2
Low Frequency
fHl
fH2
fL
10.5
12.0
V
20.0
10005
pA
0.5
V
pA
21.0
V
1.6
V
Pin 3=6V, Pin 4=GND
Pin 7=6V, Pin 6=GND
-
-
500
-
500
nA
nA
R3=191K,C3=68oopF
R3=191K,C3=6800pF
R2 =165K, C2 =0.47"F
461
.576
9.0
512
640
10
563
704
11.0
Hz
Hz
Hz
• NOTE (see electrical characteristics sheet)
1. Initiation supply voltage (Vs~~ is the supply voltage required to start the tone ringer oscillating.
2. Sustaining voltage (Vsus) is the supply voltage required to maintain oscillation.
3. VTA and irA are the conditidhs applied to trigger in to start oscillation for Vsus ~Vee ~VSI
4. VOIS and lOIS are the conditions applied to trigger in to inhibit oscillation for VSI~Vee
5. Trigger current must be limited to this value externally.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
10
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2410/KA2411
CIRCUIT CURRENT-5UPPLY VOLTAGE (No Load)
4.0
3.5
~3.0
B
12.5
.iI
;t2.o
V
S
.II ,.5
i-'"
~
II
,.0
0.5
10
14
18
Vee (V), Supply
22
26
30
34
"""ge
Fig. 2
APPLICATION NOTE
The application circuit illustrates the use of the KA2410/KA2411 devices in typical telephone or extension tone ringer
application.
The AC ringer signal voltage appears across the TIP and RING inputs of the circuit and is attenuated by capacitor C, and
resistor R,.
C, also provides isolation from DC voltages (48V) on the exchange line.
After full wave rectification by the bridge diode, the waveform is filtered by capacitor C4 to provide a DC supply for the tone
ringer Chip.
As this voltage exceeds the initiation voltage (Vsl),osciliation starts.
With the components shown, the output frequency chops between 512 (f~,) and 640Hz·(fh2) at a 10Hz (fl ) rate.
The loudspeaker load is coupled through a 13000 to 80 transformer.
The output coupling capacitor Cs is required with transformer coupled loads.
When driving a piezo-ceramic transducer type load, the coupling C 5 and transformer (13000: 80) are not required.
However, a current limiting resistor is required.
The low frequency oscillator oscillates at a rate (fl ) controlled by an external resistor (R2) and capacitor (C2).
The frequency can be determined using the relation fl =111.289 R2 • C2. The high frequency oscillates at a fH" fH2 controlled
by an external resistor (R3) and capacitor (C3). The frequency can be determined using the relation fHI=111.504 R3. C 3.
fH2=1/1.203 R3 , C 3 •
.
Pin 2 of the KA2411 allows connection of an ex~ernal resistor RSl , which is used to program the slope of the supply current vs supply voltage characteristics (see Fig 4); and hence the supply current up to the initiation voltage (Vsi). This initiation voltage remains constant independent of Rsl .
The supply current drawn prior to triggering varies inversely with RSl.· decreasing for increasing value of resistance. Thus,
increasing the value of RSl• will decrease the amount of AC ringing current required to trigger the device. As such, longer
sucribser loopS are possible since less voltage is dropped per unit length of loop wire due to the lower current level. RSl
can also be used to compensated for smaller AC coupling capacitors (Cs on Fig 3) (higher impedance) to the line which can
be used to alter the ringer equivalence number of a tone ringer circuit.
The graph in Fig. 4 illustrates the variation of supply current with supply voltage ofthe KA2411. Three curves are drawn to
show the variation of i~itiation current with Rsl . Curve B (RSl =6.81<) shows the I-V characteristic for the KA2411 tone ringer.
Curve A is a plot with RSl <6.8KO and shows an increase in the current drawn up to the initiation voltage Vsi. The W charac,
teristic after initiation remains unchanged. Curve C iIIurates the effect of increasing RSL above 6.8K Initiation current decreases
but again current after triggering is unchanged.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
71
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2410/KA2411
APPLICAnQN CIRCUIT 2 (KA2411)
8 I------U-_.__----.
101(0
VOL
...---+---+------0----1
2
KA2411
2'JV
Ro--+----'
RSL
c.
Fig. 3
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2411 Supply Current (No Load) Vs. Supply Voltage
1-1-
--
----
,
--
,-
-
75
as
.. A)R".SKO
I
I
2.5
8) R,.-&
1.1;
o.s
iKcr.-1/
C)R... 'Sko
~
~
i41i~
)
•
:
,
I ~,
,
,
•
;"'1-
610141822263034
Supply
_go (V)
Fig. 4,
,c8
Sj'MSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
,72
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2410/KA2411
EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT
(Pin 2 Input)
INHIBITING OSCILLATION
+Vcc
KA2410
Pin 2
R
O >Zt.); the main part is sent to the line Via R6.
The imPedance At. is defined as.fu
1..3
V
(R6+Ze)II(R5+Zt.)
(~
R= ~+(R6+ZB)II(R5+Zt.) R6+Zt
To reduce the receiving input Signal,
also, In order to reduce power loss in R5 & Ze and to transfer the maximum power to the line via R6.
R5+ZB> >R6+ZL
R6+ZM=ZL
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
81
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2412A
Then the line impedance ZL grows lrom SOO ohm up to 900 ohm when the line length Increases. '
The voltage driven to the line is
ZL
x'"
V L - RS+Zu +4 _IT
In order to maximize sending Gain
ZL»RS
Therefore, in the case 01 the KA2412 test circuit:
RS= 75, ZM =S.8K111, ZL =SOO
·VL ..
4
Z xZuh=28S.82h
Zu+R8+ L
• In receiving mode:
'
,
The J!C signal coming from the line is sensed across the secon 600mV and < 3.0 VOlt).
9
,DP*
Depressed Pushbutton (Output) - Normally low: A Logic "1" indicates one and only one,
button of the DTMF keypad is depressed.
10
m*
Tone output (Input)
disabled.
1.1
MS*
' Mute/Single tone (Output) - A Logic "1" indicates a'row and/or column tone is being
generated. A Logic "0" indicates tone generator is disabled.
12
A+*
MPU Power Supply (input) - Enables pullups 'on the microprocessor section outputs,
Additionally, this voltage will power the entire circuit (except tone Ringer) in the absence of
voltage at V--,
13
110*
Input/Output - Serial Input or Output data (determined by DO input) to or from the
microprocessor for storing or retrieving telephone numbers. Guaranteed to be a Logic "1"
on powerup if 00= Logic "0".
14
00*
Data Direction (Input) - Determines direction of data flow through 110 pin. As a Logic "1",
I/O is an input to the DTMF generator. As a Logic "0". I/O outputs keypad entires to the
microprocessor.
ES**
Sidetorie Equalization terminal connects an external resistor between the junction of RS, R9
and V-, At loop currents greater than the equalization threshold this resistor is switched in
to reduce the sidetone level.
CL*
Clock (Input) - Serially shifts data in or out of 110 pin. Data is transferred on negative edge
typically at 20kHz.
EV**
Voice equalization terminal connecis an external resistor between V+ and V-, for loop length
equalization. At loop currents greater than the equalization threshold this resistor is switched
in by the equalization circuit to reduce the transmit and receive gains.
16,17
CR1,CR2
Ceramic Resonator oscillator input and feedback terminals, respectively. The DTMF dialer
is intended to operate with a 500kHz ceramic resonator from which row and coJumn tones
are synthesized.
28
CAL
Amplitude CALibration terniinal for DTMF dialer. Resistor R14 from the CAL pin to V controls the DTMF output signal level at Tip and Ring.
35
FB
Feed Back terminal for DTMF output. Capacitor C14 connected from FB to V+ provides ac
. feedback to reduce the output impedance to Tip and Ring when tone dialing.
29
VR
Voltage Regulator output terminal. VR is the output of a 1.1 volt voltage regulator which
supplies power to the,speech network amplifiers and DTMF generator during signaling. To
improve regulator efficiency at low lin!l,current conditions, an external PNP pass-transistor
T1 is used in the regulator circuit. Capacitor C9 frequency compensates the VR regulator
to prevent o s c i l l a t i o n . '
33
BP
Base of a PNP Pass-transistor. Under long-loop conditions where low line voltages would
cause VR to fall below 1.1-volts, BP drives the PNP transistor T1 into saturation, thereby ,
minimizing the voltage drop across the pass transitor. At line voltages which maintain VA'
above. 1.1 volts, BP biases T1 in the linear region thereby regulating the VR voltage. Transistor
T1 also couples the ac speech signals from the transmit amplifier to Tip anti Ring at V+.
15
*KA2417 only
c8
When a Logic "1", disables the DTMF generator. Keypad is not
**KA2414 only
SAMSUNG SE~ICONDUCTOR
94
KA2414/KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARII2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
PIN DESCRIPTION (Continued)
(See Fig. 12 for external component identifications.)
Pin
Designation
Function
34
V+
The more positive input to the regulator, speech, andDTMF sections connected to Tip and Ring
through the polarity guard diode bridge.
30
V-
The dc common (more negative input) connected to Tip and Ring through the polarity guard
bridge. ,
32
LR
DC Load Resistor, ResiStor R4 from LR to V- determines the dc input resistance at Tip and Ring.
This resistor is external not only to enable programming the dc resistance but also to avoid high
on-chip power dissipation with short telephone lines. It acts as a shunt load conducting the excess
dc line current. At low line voltages « 3.0 volts), no current flows through LA.
31
LC
DC Load CapaCitor. CapaCitor C11 from LC to V- forms a low-pass filter which prevents the resistor at LR from loading ac speech and DTMF signals.
20
MIC
Microphone negative supply terminal. The dc current from the electret microphone is returned
to V- through the MIC terminal which is connected to the collector of an on-chip NPN transistor. The base of this transistor is controlled either internally by the mute signal from the DTMF
generator, or externally by the logic input pin MM.
18
MM
Microphone Mute. The MM pin proVides a means to mute the microphone and transmit
amplifier in response to a digital control signal. When this pin is connected to a Logic "1" '
(> 2.0V) the microphone dc'return path through the MIC terminal is disabled.
22
TXI
Transmit amplifier Input. TXI is the input to the transmit amplifier from an electret microphone.
AC coupling c Rinp
I
TRC
Piem.
Tone
Ringer
Fig. 7
MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE (KA2417 ONLy)
The MPU interface connects the keypad and OTMF sections of the ETC to a microprocessor for storing and retrieving
numbers to be dialed. Figure 8 shows the major blocks of the MPU interface section and the interconnections between the
keypad interface, OTMF generator and microprocessor. Each button of a 12 or 16 number keypad is represented by a fourbit code (Figure 9). This four-bit code is used to load the programmable counters to generate the appropriate rr:JN and column
tones. The code is transferred serially to or from the microprocessor when the shift register is clocked by the microproces- .
sor. Data is transferred through the 110 terminal, and the direction of data flow is determined by the Data Direction (~O) input
terminal. In the manual dialing mode, DO is a logic "0" and the four-bit code from the keypad is fed to the OTMF generator
by the digital multiplexer and also output on the 1/0 terminal through the four-bit shift register. The data sequence on the
1/0 terl)1inal is 83, 82, 81, 80 aQd is transferred on the negative edge of the clock input (CL). In this mode the shift register
load enable circuit cycles the register between the load and read modes such that multiple read cycles may be run for a singlekey closure. Six complete clock cycles are required to output data from the ETC and reload the register for a second look.
In the automatic dialing mode, DO is a Logic "1" and the four-bit code is serially entered in the sequence 83, 82, 81, 80
into the four-bit shift register. Thus, only four clock cycles are required to transfer a number into the ETC. The keypad is disabled in this mode. A Logic "1" on the Tone Output (TO) will disable tone outputs until valid data from the microprocessor
is in place. Subsequently 10 is switched to a Logie "0" to enable the OTMF generator. Figures10 and 11show the timing waveforms for the manual and automatic dialing modes and Table 2 specifies timing limitations.
The keypad decoder's exclusive OR circuit generates the OP and MS output signals. The OP output indicates (when at
a logic "1 ") t~at one, and only one, key is depressed, thereby indicating valid data is available to the MPU. The OP output
can additionally be used to initiate a data transfer sequence to the microprocessor. The MS output (when at a Logic "1") indicates the OTMF generator is enabled and the speech network is muted.
Pin A+ is to be connected to a source of 2.5 to 10 volts (generally from the microprocessor circuit) to enable the pullup
circuits on the microprocessor intel'fitce outputs (OP, MS, 1/0). Additionally, this voltage will pOwer the entire Circuitry (except
Tone Ringer) in the absence of voltage at V+. This permits use ofthe transmit and receive amplifiers, keypad interface, and
OTMF generator for non-typical telephone functions.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
99
KA24141KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARlI2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM (KA2417 ONLY)
r-----------~~~~~ID
Excluslve-OA
8
}-=---,
DP
MS
8
Keypad
Keypad
Decoder 1---.:~r---'-'-""1
1-+""+'-I-..A'Comparators
Shift
~":~sterl--_---I
Enable
Fig.S
MPU INTERFACE CODES
[Q
0
~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[] 0
0
0
~
G
I
I
I
I
C1
C2
Cs
C4
Key
~
1
2
-
-
Row
Column
Code (B3 - BO)
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
1111
'0111
1011
1101
0101
1001
1110
0110 '
1010
0100
0011
0001
0010
0000
1100
1000
A1
3
A2
4
5
6
As
7
S
9
0
A
B
C
0
f- A4
*
#
.'
4
4
4
3
1'
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
4
4
4
1
3
Fig. 9
c8
,
,
sAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
100
KA2414/KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARlI2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
OUTPUT DATA CYCLE FROM KA2417
NOTE:
00
-
'ro may be low (Tone generator enabled) if desired.
~____t~~
__D_ep___se_d_________________________~
__
R_ele_as_ed-rl_
11111////1
1O~
MS~_ _~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
DP
_.
I
L
_ _ _ _ _ _--!tOPCl
H
CL
Fig. 10
INPUT DATA CYCLE TO KA2417
00
.--J
Tone generation interval
~1·__~loo_o_o________~~~
roJ
W~------~W
!
L
,
MS~
DP
_
CL
I
I
I
H
tOOCl
I--i tCllO
tH
f--+-l tl
---11.IlnfL...,~J1Jl.1UL
tos --II-- H tOH
IK)~~~
1st Digit
2nd Digit
3rd Digit
Fig. 11
c8
SAr-tSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
101
· KA2414/KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARlI2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
TABLE 1 - FREQUENCY SYNTttEStZER ERRORS
DTMF
Standard
(Hz)
Tone Output
Frequency with
500KHz Oscillator
697
770
852
941
1209
1336
1477
1633
696.4
769.2
'853.2
939.8
1207.7
1336.9
1479.3
1634.0
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
% Deviation
from Standard
-0.086
-0.104
+0.141
-0.128
-~.108
+0.067
+0.156
+0.061
TABLE 2 - TIMING LIMITATIONS
Symbol
Min
Typ Max
Unit
Ref
fel
Clock Frequency
0
t,:,
Clock High Time
15
p.S
10, 11
tl
Clock Low Time
15
p.S
10,11
t r, tf
Clock, Rise, Fall Time
Clock Transition to
Data Valid
Time from DPHigh
to CL Low
Time from DO High
toCLLow
Data Set-up Time
Data Hold Time
Time from cL Low
Low
Time from TO High
to DO High
toy
tOPCl
tOOCl
tos
tOH
tclTO
tTOOO
c8
Parameter
toro
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUC1"()R
20
30.
kHz
Figs.
Figs.
2.0
p.S
10
p.S
Fig. 10
20
p.S
Fig. 10
20
p.S
Fig. 11
10
10
p.S
"s
Fig. 11
Fig. 11
10
"s
Fig. 11
20
"s
Fig. 11
102
KA2414/KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARII2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
APPLICATIONS INFORMATION
Fig 12 specifies a typical application circuit for the KA2414 and KA2417.
Complete listing of external components are provided at the end of this section along with nominal component values.
The hook switch and polarity guard bridge configuration in Fig. 12 is one of several options. If two bridges are used, one
for the tone ringer and the other for speech and dialer circuits, then the hook switch can be simplified. Component values
should be varied to optimize telephone performance parameters for each application. The relationships between the application circuit components and certain telephone parameters ,are briefly described in the following:
On-Hook Input Impedance.
R1, C15, and Z3' are significant components for on-hook impedance. C15 dominates at low f~uencies, R1 at high
frequencies and Z3 provides the non-linearity required for 2.5V and 10V impedance signature tests. C15 must generally
be s1.01'F to satisfy 5.0Hz impedance specifications. (EIA RS-470)
Tone Ringer Output Frequencies
R3 and C13 control the frequency (fo) of a relaxation oscillator.
Typically fo= (R3 C13 + S.OpS) -1. The output tone frequencies are fof10 and fo/8. The warble rate is fo/64O. The tone ringer
will operate with fo from 1.0KHz to 10KHz. R3 should be limited to values between 150K and 300K.
Tone Ringer Input Threshold
After R1, C15. and Z3 are chosen to satisfy on-hook impedance specifications, R2 is chosen for the desired ring start
threshold.
Increasing R2 reduces the ac input voltage required to activate the tone ringer output. R2 should be limited to values between
O.8K and 2.0KO.
Off-Hook DC Resistance
R4 conducts the dc line current in excess of the speech and dialer bias current. Increasing R4 increases the input resistance
of the telephone for line currents above 10mA. R4 should be selected between 300 and 1200.
Off-Hook AC Impedance
The ac input impedance is equal to the receive amplifier load impedance (at RXO) divided by the receive amplifier gain
(voltage gain from V+ to RXO). Increasing the impedance of the receiver increases the impedance of the telephone.
Increasing the gain of the receiver amplifier decreases the impedance of the telephone.
DTMF Output Amplitude
R14 controls the amplitude of the row and column DTMF tones. Decreasing R14 increases the level of tones generated
at V+. The ratio of row and column tone amplitudes is internally fixed. R14 should be greater than 200to avoid excessive
current in the DTMF output Amplifier.
Transmit Output Level '
R10 controls the maximum signal amplitude produced at V+ by the transmit amplifier. Decreasing R10 increases the transmit
output signal at V+. R10 should be greater than 2200 to limit current in the transmit amplifier output.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
103
II
KA2414/KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARlI2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
Transmit Gain
The gain from the microphone to the telephone line varies directly with R11. Increasing R11 increases the signal applied
to R10 and the ac current driven through R10 to the telephone line. The closed loop-gain from the mi,crophone to the TXO
terminal should be greater than 10 to prevent transmit amplifier oscillations.
Note: Adjustments to transmit level and gain are complicated by the addition of receiver sidetone current to the transmit
amplifier output current at V+. Normally the sidetone current from the receiver will increase the transmit signal (ifthe
current in the receiver is in phase with that in R10). Thus the transmit gain and sidetone levels cannot be adjusted
independently.
Receiver Gain
Feedback resistor R6 adjusts the gain at the receiver amplifier. Increasing R6 increases the receiver' amplifier gain.
Sidetone Level
'Sidetone reduction is achieved by the cancellation of receiver'amplifier input signals from ~9 and R5. R8, R15, and C6
determine the phase of the sidetone balance signal in R9. The ac voltage at the junction of R8 and R9 should be 1800 out
of phase with the voltage at V+. R91s selected such that the signal current in R9 is slightly greater than that in R5. This insures
that the sidetone current in the receiver adds to the transmit amplifier output current.
Microprocessor Interface (KA2417 Only)
The six microprocessor interface lines (DP, TO, MS, DO, 1/0, and cr.) can be connected directly to a port, as shown in
Figure 13. The DP line (Depressed Pushbutton) is also connected to an interrupt line to signal the microprocessor to begin a read data sequence when storing a number into memory. The KA2417 clock speed requirement is slow enough
(typically 20kHz) so that it is not necessary to divide down the processor's system clock, but rather a port output can be
toggled. This facilitates synchronizing the clock and data transfer, eliminating the need for hardware,to generate the clock.
The DO pin must be maintained at a Logic "0" when the microprocessor section is not in, use, so as tei permit normal
operation of the keypad.
When the microprocessor interface section is not in use, the supply voltage at Pin 12 (A+) may be disconnected to conserve power. Normally the speech circuitry is powered by the voltage supplied at the V+ terminal (Pin 34) from the telephone
lines. During this time, A+ powers only the active pullups on the three microprocessor outputs (DP, MS, and VOl. When
the telephone is "on-hook," and V+ falls below 0.6cvolts, power is then supplied to the telephone speech and dialer circuitry
from A+. Powering the circuit from the A+ pin permits communication with a micrpprocessor, andlor use of the transmit
and receiver amplifiers" while the telephone is "on-hook."
Equalization of Speech Network (KA2414 Only)
Resistors R17 and R18 are'switched into the circuit when the voltage at the LR terminal exceeds the equalization threshold
voltage (iypically 1.65V). R17 reduces the transmit and receive gains for loop currents greater than the threshold (short loops)
by attenuating signals at tip and ring. R18 reduces the sidetone level which would otherwise increase when R17 is switched
,
into the circuit. The voltage VLR at LR terminal is given by
VLR =(lL-ls)xR4.
where IL =Ioop current
Is=dummy load current (6.0 mA)+speech network current (4.0 mAl.
Thus resistor R4 is selected to activate the equalization circuit at the desired loop current, However, R4 must be selected keeping in mind the fact that it also controls the dc resistance of the telephone. CapaCitors C18 and C19 prevent dc current
flow into the EV and ES terminals. This reduces cliCks alld also prevents changes in the dc characteristic of the telephone
when the EV andES terminals are switched to low impedance.
i8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
104
KA2414/KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARlI2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
APPLICATION CIRCUIT 1
DTMF Pad
Row-Column Switch Clolsure
4
7
5
8
S2
I
SI, S2, controlled
by hook switch; Illustrated
in "on-hook"
condition.
Rt8
RING
C17
Electret
Microphone
'Rx used with
2-terminal mike only_
APPLICATION CIRCUIT 2
Fig_ 12
DTMF Pad
Row-Column Switch Clolsure
SI, S2, controlled
by hook switch; Illustrated
in "on-hook"
condition.
MC6800
System
vss
'Rx used with
2-termlnal mike only.
Fig_ 13
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
105
KA2414/KA2417 (DELETION) LlNEARII2L INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
EXTERNAL ,COMPONENTS
(Component labels referenced to Fig. 12, Fig. 13)
Capacitors
Nominal value
I
Description'
C1
1.0"F,1OV
Tone ringer filter capacitor: integrates the voltage from current sense resistor R2
at the input of the threshold detector.
C2
4.7"F,25V
Tone ringer input capacitor: filters the rectified tone ringer input signal to smooth
the supply potential for oscillator and output buffer.
C3
1.0"F,3.OV
Transmit limiter'low-pass filter capaqitor: controls attack and decay time oftransmit
peak limiter.
C4,C5
O.1/IF
Transmit amplifier input capacitors: prevent dc current flow into TXL pin and
attenuates low-frequency noise on microphone lead.
C6
O.05"F
Sidetone network capacitor: provides phase-shift in sidetone path to match that
caused by telephone line reactance.
C7,C8
O.05"F
Receiver amplifier input capacitors: prevent dc current flow into FM terminal and
attneuates low frequency noise on the telephone line.
C9
2.2"F,3.0V
VR regulator capacitor: frequency compensates the VR regulator to prevent
oscillation.
C10
O.Q1,.F
Receiver amplifier output capacitor: frequency compensates the receiver amplifier
to prevent oscillation.
C11
O.1,.F
DC load filter capacitor: prevents the dc load circuit from a:ttenuating ac signals
onV+.
C12
O.01,.F
Telephone line by pass capacitor: terminates telephone line for high frequency
signals and preVents oscillation in the VR regulator.
C13
620pF
Tone ringer oscillator capacitor: determines clock frequency for tone and warble
frequency synthesizers.
C14
O.1,.F
DTMF output feed back capacitor: ac couples feed back around the DTMF output
amplifier which reduces output impedance.
C15
1.0"F, 250vac
NoncPoiarized
tone ringer line capacitor; ac couples the tone ringer to the telephone line partially
------{,5
NON INVERTING
OllTPUT
OUTPUT
AMP
~------------------------------------~3~----------------~4~------------~--------------------____------------~
GND
SWEEP RATE '
CONTROL CAPACllOR
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
CONTROL RESISlOR
Fig. 1
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
108
KA2418
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
=
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta 25°C)
Characteristic
Calling Voltage (f=50Hz) Continuous
Calling Voltage (f=50Hz)
5 Sec ON/10 Sec OFF
Supply Current
Operating Temeprature
Storage and Junction Temeprature
Value
Unit
VAB
90
Vrms
VAe
110
Vrms
Icc
Top
TSIg
22
-20- + 70
-65-+150
mA
°C
°C
Symbol
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(T. = 25°C unless otherwise specified)
Characteristic
Symbol
Supply Voltage
Vee
Current Consumption without Load
Ie
Activiation Voltage
VON
Activiation Voltage Range
VONR
Sustaining Voltage
VOFF
Differential Resistance in
Off Condition
Ro
Output Voltage Swing
VOUT ,
Short Circuit Current
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
26
V
1.5
1.8
mA
12.2
13
V·
8
10
V
8
8.8
V
Vs=8.8 to 26V
RA=1kll
6.4
lOUT
Unit
kll
Vcc-3
V
35
mA
AC OPERATION
Characteristic
Symbol
Output Frequencies
fOUT'
fouT2
Test Condition
Vee =26V, R, =14kll
Vce=OV
Vcc=6V
fouT' Range
R, =27kll to 1.7kll
Sweep Frequency
R,=14kll,C,=100nF
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Min
lYP
Max
Hz'
Hz
1,900
1,300
0.1
15
10
Unit
KHz
Hz
109
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2418
TEST AND APPLICATION CIRCUIT
r------------------~w_-__,
I
R.
I
1"F, 25(11//>C
TIP
O.22,.F
1 2.2KO
.----"1'"-----U------l
C2
I
R2
I
I
10K~
10K
6
8
I
I
I
I
I
I
VAS TEL LINE
I
I
Vour
4
I
~i~
I
I
Cl
100nF
RING
I
R,
I
12Kll
I
I
I
'-______
h
. 2.67-10"
= R,(KO)
I
....------------..J
--'_~--_---_+_-----
12=
1000
C,(nF)
~h
fsweep=·--
7
Fig. 2
DESCRIPTION
The KA2418 tone ringer derive its powen supply by rectifying the AC ringing signal. It uses this power to activate two tone
generators. The two tone fraquencies generated ara switched by an internal oscillator in a fast· sequence and made audible
across an output amplifier in the loudspeaker; both tone fnequencies and the switching frequency can be externally adjusted.
The device can drive either dineclly a piezo ceramic converter (buzzer) or small loudspeaker. In case of using a loudspeaker,
a transfonmer is needed.
An internal shunt voltage Regulator provides DC voltage to output stage, low fraquency oscillator, an High fnequency oscillator. To protect the IC from telephone line transients, a zener Diode· is included.
EXTERNAL CC;>MPONENTS (refer to test circuit)
R, : Output fnequency control nesistor
C, : Sweep nate control capacitor
R2 : Line input rasistor. R~ffects the tone ringer·input impedance. It also influences ringing threshold voltage and
limits currant from line transients.
.
C2 : Line input capacitor. C2AC couples the tone ringer to the telephone line and controls ringer input impedance at
low fnequencies.
C3 : Ringer supply capacitor, C3 filters supply voltage for the tone generating circuits.
R. : Activation voltage adjustable resistor
c8 SAMSU~G
SEMICONDUCTOR
110
KA2420 (DELETION)
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
VOICE SWITCHED SPEAKER-PHONE
28 DIP
The KA2420 speaker phone chip includes amplifiers, attenuators, and
control functions necessary to design a high quality speaker phone
system. It also includes a.microphone amplifier and audio power
amplifier for speaker, background sound level monitoring system, attenuation control svstem, and the necessary regulated voHages for
internal and the external circuits. This will permit operation from the
mains with no additional power supply required.
The chip select pin will facilitate power down 'when the chip is not
selected. The volume control may be implemented by using an external
potentiometer. The KA2420 can be used in a wide variety of applications
such as; intrecom systems, business, automotive or household
telephones.
28 SOP~
FEATURES
•
•
•
,•
•
•
•
•
Level detection and attenuation controls on single chip
Monitoring for background noise level with large time constant
On-chip regulation for supply and reference' voltages
Wide range of operation due to signal compression
Very low output power (10mW typ.) with peak limiting for minimizing distortion
Chip Select allowing standby mode of operation
ORDERING INFORMATION
Volume can be controlled linearly
28 pin' plastic DIP & SOP package
Device
Package Operating Temperature
BLOCK DIAGRAM
KA2420N
28 DIP
KA2420D
28 SOP
-20_+60°C
r--------------------,I
I
TRANSMIT CHANNEL
I
SPEAKER I
~I~-R...E-C-EI-VE-C-H-A-N-NE 1.6V), the chip is in the standby mode drawing O.5mA. An open CS pin is a logic "0 ". Input
impedance is nominally 140KO. The input voltage should not exceed 11V.
19
SKI
Input to the speaker amplifier. Input impedance is nominally 20KO.
Vee
A 5.4V regulated output which powers all circuits except the speaker amplifier output stage. Vee
can be used to power external circuitry such as a microprocessor (3.0mA max.). A filter capaCitor
is required. The KA2420 can be powered by a separate regulated supply by connecting V+ and
Vee to a voltage between 4.5V and 6.5V while maintaining CS at a logic "1".
20
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
112
KA2420 (DELETION)
PIN DESCRIPTION
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
(Continued)
Description
Pin
Name
21
VB
An output voltage equal to approximately Vcc12 which serves as an analog ground for the
speakerphone system. Up to l.5mA of external load current may be sourced from VB. Output
impedance is 2500. A filter capacitor is required.
22
Gnd
Ground pin for the IC (except the speaker amplifier)
23
XDC
Transmit detector output. A resistor and capacitor at this pin hold the system in the transmit mode
during pauses between words or phrases. When the XDC pin vohage decays to ground. the
attenuators switch from the transmit mode to the idle mode. The internal resistor at XDC is
•
nominally 2.6KO (see Fig. 1)
24
VLC
Volume control input. Connecting this pin to the slider of a variable resistor provides receiVe mode
volume control. The VLC pin voltage should be less than or equal to VB.
25
ACF
Attenuator control filter. A capacitor connected to this pin reduces noise transients as the
attenuator control switches levels of attenuation.
26
RXO
Output of the receive attenuator. Normally this pin is ac coupled to the input of the speaker
amplifier.
27
RXI
Input of the receive attenuator. Input resistance is nominally 5.oKO.
RRX
A resistor to ground determines the nominal gain of the receive attenuator. The receive channel
.
gain is directly proportional to the RRX resistance.
28
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Voltages referred to Pin 22, T.=2S0C)
Ch~racteristic
Value
Unit
Speaker Amp Ground (Pin 14)
V + Terminal Voltage (Pin 16)
CS (Pin 18)
VLC (Pin 24)
Storage Temperature
+3.0. -1.0
+12. -1.0
+12. -1.0
Vee. -1.0
-65-150
V
V
V
V
·C
"Maximum Ratings" ~re those values Ileyond which the safety of the device cannot be guarariteed. They are not meant
to imply that the devices should be operated at these limits. The "Electrical Characteristics" tables provide conditions
for actual device operation.
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Characteristi~
Value
Unit
O-S.O
mVrrns
Speaker Amp Ground (Pin 14)
-10-10
mV
V+ Terminal Voltage (Pin 16)
+6.0-11
V
Microphone Signal (Pin 9)
CS(Pin 18)
0-11
V
lee (Pin 20)
0-3.0
mA
0.5SVB-VB
V
Receive Signal (Pin 27)
0-2S0
mVrrns
Ambient Temperature
-20:"'6(l
OC
VLC(Pin24)
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
113
.
.
KA2420.(DELETION)
.
.
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Refer-to Fig. 1)
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
lYP
Max
Unit
9.0
800
mA
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
V+ Supply Current
Iv +
V+=11V, Pin 18=0.7V .
V+=11V, Pin 18=1.6V
Vee Voltage
Vee
V+=7.5V
Vcc Line Regulation
IlVC9
4.9
Ji'..
5.4
5.9
V
6!5V
:D
Z
-t
m
C)
~
~
m
c
-o.
0
:D
......
......
0>
Fig. 1
·1 §i
KA2420 (DELETION)
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
TRANSMIT ATTENUATOR Vs RTX
-10
JaxGl.n
-~
+10
+10
....... <:.6·~l
i'..
....
-20
~-30
r--.,
"lr-..
1
MaJG~innU
- - &V8cf.l50mV
-20
e
/,'
\
I""
-10
"
~
Max Attenuation
&V8cf·l50mV
-40
/
~
-30
~
./ ~Max Attenuation
-40
~
-50
-60
RECEIVE ATTENUATOR Vs RRX
RJ.JK
f-vLf"la
I'
-70
-50
"
'
r-- RR• 3OK
VLC·VB
RRX(OHMS)
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
GAIN AND ATTENUATION
Vs RESISTOR RATIOS
-10
-20
JRX~l~K
VB
+5 t--RTX.91K
RR·3OK
l""'r--.
l/~
f8
-60
-15
i, ~
(ID(
"
~
,
./
40
/"
/
:
-.l
I
DB
~
1.0
/
"'
~
I--......
L
"
60
80
100
&YacI (MILUVOLTS)
Fig. a
,......
J
~~
/
/
200
V
f'..
RR=3OK
RTX-91K
RRX.18K
-25
c8
,
Level
LOG AMP TRANSFER CHARACTERISTICS
GRX . / "
-20
-35
,
0.4
D.6
. YLCIV.
0.2
i
"-
-15
-30
r\
Minimum
:-- Recommended
250
-5
18
:
1,\
Fig. 5
.
-10 f--
JL
~
-40
10
5.0
ATTENUATOR GAIN Va aYacf
+5
V
v:
VLC.va
1.0
RATIO
Fig. 4
.i.
: I\.
-35
1
0.5
V
GRy'"
Li,
-30
I 1111
0.1
,,
,
:
i)
ATX vs. RTXlRR
&V8cf·150mV
ARX vs. ARXIRR
&V8cf·6.0mV
\
-20
~
I<'
-50
:
Receive
I"roo...
-40
!
GTX
-10 t - - Modo
i)(
-30
r-..
-5 t--LCUi1
V
&V8cf-l50mV
'II
ATTENUATOR GAIN Vs VLC
~T) R~x/bR
r-- ..:1Vacf= 6.0mV
~::~ RRXlRR~
lOOK
10K
lK
1M
RTX(OHMS)
+10
II
Usable Range -
-70
lOOK
10K
.,
&V8cf-6.OmV
-80
50 -
f'-
120
INPUT~
CURRENT
(RLI, TLI. XOI)
~
140
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
0
180
I Vi
-20
+
(RLO. TLO, CP2)-
OUTPUT,
I I VOLjE
-40
-80
DC INPUT CURRENT (foA)
Fig. 7
-80
117
KA2420 (DELETION)
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
SPEAKER AMP OUTPUT
Va SUPPLY VOLTAGE
,.
LOG AMP TRANSFER CHARACI'ERISTICS
".,.. ~
120
/
I-I--+-+-
/ .V
2D
0
I
No load
250 Load
I
'/
/
VL
30
V
k":
--
.
4.05.06.07DS.o
V+ (VOLTS)
fig. I
'~r
,
t--
9.\..1011
RESPONSE AT CP2 AND CPt
600
-
I ",vepl (Pin 1'1)
500
./
,...
-~...-
~
/
V
/
I
I
100
fl
AVCP2(Pin 12)
V
0
1O!J
150
YMCO (rrN RMS)
Fig. 1.
200
TRANSMIT DETECTOR OPERATION
Inpu~i:~1111111~1111111111111111111111111111111111~I---~m~llilllllllllllllllll~
J
1 .
CP2 (Pin 12) .1
.
I.
..IV,
Solid
~~~~~Pl
Don.dLine=.
Noninverting
\
. Cit
dV ~ c(~'ZV/s.ec)
10pA
(~200mV)
.
r-r--------------
I
~~~~~rT~;~~'t __ ~
~
~.
.
I·
:1' 2.7xav,
r
36rnV
7
Slope = O.5V/sec
I
4 Volts
XDC (Pin 23) ,~
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
NOTE: Above values are typical based
Fig. 11
on components shown in Fig. 1.
118
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2420 (DELETION)
SUPPLY CURRENT Vs SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Vs SPEAKER POWER
SUPPLY CURRENT Vs SUPPLY VOLTAGE
ao
35
71J
/
6.0
V1
100.1-
\
30
'I
5.0
'i+
I
8Oi-
I
OS=o
5OJ-
25
VSKOa OVrms
~
.§.
4.0
..!
..!
20
3.0
~
20rriW . ---
I
21J
,A
15
1.0
./ :...t
CS=1
I
4.0
5.0
6.0
71J 8.0 9.0
V+(VOLTS)
Fig. 12
10
6IJi
./
10
11
10rriW,
41J
6.0
5.0
7.0 6.0 9.0
V+(VOLTS)
Fig. 13
10
11
SUPPLY CURRENT Vs SUPPLY
VOLTAGE (see Fig. 14)
25
i
i
ALTERNATE POWER SUPPLY CONFIGURATION
,i-,
20
-cs
Vee
16
22
.
V+
iI
,,,
,
,,
,
I
i
,
,,
I
Vs
1i7
,/
(Regu lated supply)
Zl1000.F
Fig. 14
5.0
r.'7
o
~
4.0
SWITCHING TIME
I
I
II
,'
I
,,
10
Is
J-------!
Operating Range ...
,
,,
15
20
Allowahle
,,
KA2420
18
I
I
I
L--- V-
.......-;
,
,,
/
,/
i
,
:
,,,
I
I
I
I
5.0
61J
V.(VOLTS)
Fig. 15
7.0
6.0
The switching times of the speakerphone depends on the external components and the instantanious operating conditions
at the time when a change takes place. For example, the switching time for changing between transmit ~nd receive modes
is much longer than that from idle to transmit.
The components connected at pin 5 "transimit turn-on': pin 6 "transmit-turn-off': pin 7 '~receive-turn-on" and pin 8 "receiveturn·off" have major influence on the timing between the transmit and receive modes. The Tx·Rx comparator compares
the relative and not the absolute values so the above referenced four timing functions interact with each other. The timing
from transmit to idle is affected by the components at pins 11, 12, 13 and 23. The timing from idle to transmit is faster and
hence the components have no major influence on it.
c8SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
119
I
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2420 (DELETION)
The table below indicates the degree of influence of various components on the switching time, including the volume
cont.rol;
Additionally, the following should be noted:
1) The RCs at'Pin 5 and Pin 7 affect the sensitivity of the respective log amplifiers, or how loud the speech must be for
gain control of the speakerphone circuit.
2) The RC at Pin 13 controls the sensitivity of the transmit detector circuit.
3) The switching speed and the relative response to transmit signal are affected by the volume control, in manner as follows:
When the \/OIume control reduces, the signal at TXO increases, and consequently the signal to the TLI pin in the receive
mode circuit.
Components
RC at Pin 5
RC at Pin 6
AC at Pin 7
AC at Pin 8
AC at Pin 11
C at Pin 12
AC at Pin 13
AC at Pin 23
V at Pin 24
C at Pin 25
I
I
Tx to Rx
Rxto1X
,
high
medium
medium
high
low
low
low
low
medium
medium
medium
high
high
medium
no influence
no inlluence
no influence
no influence
no influence
medium
I
Txtoldle
no influence
. no influence
no influence
noinlluence
medium
high
low
high
·noinlluence
low
. Switching response times for the circuit of Fig. 1 are shown in the photographs of Fig. 16 and Fig. 17.
In Fig. 16, the circuit is supplied a continuous receive signal of 1.1mVp.p at AXI as shownTrace #3. Mel as shown. Trace
#1 openites a repetitiVe signal of 7.2rriVp.p for 120msec, and repeated every 1sec. Trace #2 is the TXO output being about
650mVp.p at its maximum. Trace #4 is the RXO output being about 2.2mVp.p at its maximum.
The switching time from the receive mode to transmit mode is about 40msec required for TXO to turn on, and for RXO
to tum off. After the signal at MCI is turned off, the switching time back to the receive mode is about 210msec.
In Fig. 17 a continuous signal of 7.6rriVp.p is supplied to MCI as shown Trace #1, and a repetitive burst signal of 100rriVp.p
is supplied to AXI as shown Trace #3 for 12Omsec;and repeated every 1sec. Trac~ #2 is the TXO output and is about
9OrriVp.p at its, maximum, and Trace #4 shows the AXO outpufbeing about 150rriVp.p at its maximum, In this sequence, the
circuit switches between the idle mode\and the receive mode. The required 'switching time from idle to receive modeS is
about 70msec as shown in the first part of Trace #2 and Trace #4. After the receive signal is turned off, the switching time
back to the idle mode is about 100msec.
All of above mentioned switching times can change significantly not only by varying the external components but also
by varying the amplitude of input signals.
.
IDLE-RECEIVE SWITCHING
TRANSMIT-RECEIVE SWITCHING
Burst Input @ MCI
2
Oulpul @ TJ(O
3
Inpul@RXI
4
Output@RXO
Inpul@ Mel
OUlpul@TXO
2
Bursllnput @ RXI
OUlpUI- RXO
Time Base=30msJOiv
Fig. 16
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Fig. 17
120
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2420 (DELETION)
BASIC LINE POWERED SPEAKERPHONE
S1
.----------..----+__
'--_---'1-:...-
56K
".._~_
rTXIIDLE
..J Ax
_ _--. _"
rTx
:..J Idle
Compartors A & B=LM393 (Dual)
Fig. 19
qs'SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
121
KA2425A1B
"
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
TELEPHONE SPEECH NETWORK WITH
DIALER INTERFACE
18 DIP
The KA2425AiB is a Telephone Speech Network Integrated Circuit.
which Incorporates adjustable transmit, receive, and sldetone functions,
a dc loop interface Circuit, tone dialer Interface, and a regulated output
voltage for a pulse/tone dialer. Also included is an equalization amp
which compensates gains for line length variations. The conversion from
2 to 4 wire Is accomplished with a supply voltage as low as 1.5 volts.
FEATURES
• Transmit, Receive, and Sidetone Gain Set by External Resistors
• Loop Length Equalization for Transmit, Receive, and Sidetone
Functions
• Low Voltage Operates Down to 1.5 volts (V+) in Speech Mode
• Provides Regulated Voltage for CMOS Dialer
• MUTE: KA2425A, MUTE: KA2425B
• DTMF Output Level Adjustable with Single Resistor
• Compatible with 2·Termlnal Electric Microphones (ECM)
• Compatible with Receiver Impedance. of 1500 and Higher
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Tip
.-----}
~~elver
Ring 0 - - - - '
(Mute)
voo
Regulator
Mute
Logic
DTMF
Driver
DTMF
Input
c8
To
Dialer
Circuit
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR·
•
From
Microphone
Mute
Input
PulseiTone
Select
122
KA2425A1B
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
(Voltage referred to V-, Ta=25·C) (see Note 1.)
Characteristic
Value
V+ Voltage
Voo (externally applied, V + =0)
Unit
-1.0, +18
Vdc
-1.0 +6
Vdc
VLR
- 1.0, V + - 3.0
Vd
MT, MS Inputs
-1.0, Voo
+1.0
Vdc
Storage Temperature
. -65, +150
·C
Note 1: . Devices should not be operated at these values. The "Recommended Operating Conditions" provide
conditions for actual device operation:
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Characteristic
V + Voltage (Speech Mode)
(Tone Dialing Mode)
Value
Unit
+1.5 to +15
+3.3 to + 15
Vdc
Vdc
o to
Irxo (Instantaneous)
Ambient Temperature
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERJSTICS
Characteristic
10
mA
·C
-20 to +60
Symbol
(Refer to Figure 1) (Ta=25·C)
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
IL= 2O rn A
IL=30mA
IL= 120mA
IL=20mA
IL=30mA
2.6
3.0
7.0
4.1
4.6
3.2
3.7
8.2
4.9
5.4
3.8
4.4
9.5
5.7
6.2
V+=1.7V
V + = 12V
V + = 12V
4.5
5.5
6.0
7.1
8.4
8.8
9.0
12.5
14.0
V+ -VLR
V+ -VLR
-
2.7
4.3
-
36
57
94
KG
LINE INTERFACE
V+Voltage
Speech/Pulse Mode
Speech/Pulse Mode
Speech/Pulse Mode
Tone Mode.
Tone Mode
V+
V +Current (Pin 12 Grounded)
Speech Mode
Speech/Pulse Modes
Tone Mode
1+
LR Level Shift
Speech/Pulse Mode
Tone Mod.e
LC Terminal Resistance.
Vdc
mA
6.VLR
RLe
VdC
VOLTAGE REGULATORS
VR Voltage
Load Regulation
Line Regulation
VR
6.VRLO
6.VRLN
(V+=1.7V)
OmA100KO. Signals from
the line and sidetone amplifier are summed at RXI.
8
RXO
Receive amplifier output. RXO is biased by a 2.5mA current source.
Feedback maintains the DC bias voltage at:::: O.65V. Increasing R4
(between RXO and RXI) will increase the receive gain. C4 stabilizes
. the amplifier. C3 couples the signals to the receiver. The 2.5mA
current source is reduced to O.4mA when dialing.
9
RMT
Receiver Mute. The AC receiver current is retumed to V - through
an open collector NPN transistor and a parallel 10KO resistor. The
base of the NPN is controlled by'an internal mute signal. During
dialing the tr.ansistor is off, lel!ving the 10KO resistor in series with
the receiver.
10
V-
Negative supply. The most negative input connected to Tip and Ring
, through the polarity guard diode bridge.
11
VR
Regulated voltage output. The VR voltage is regulated at 1.2V and
biases the microphone ,and the speech circuits. An internal series
pass 'PNP' transistor allows for regulation with a line voltage as low
as 1:5V. Capacitor Cs stabilizes the regulator.
12
LC
DC load capacitor. An external capacitor C7 and an internal resistor
form a low pass filter between V + and LR to prevent AC signals
from being loaded by the DC load resistor R5• Forcing LC to V - will
turn off the DC load current and increase the V + voltage.
,
,
Description
Name
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
126
KA2425A1B
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
PIN DESCRIPTION
(See Fig. 1) (Continued)
Pin No.
Name
Description
13
LR
DC load resistor. Resistor R5 from LR to V - determines the DC
resistance of the telephone, and removes power dissipation from the
chip. The LR pin Is biased 2.8 volts below the V + voltage (4.5 volts
in the tone dialing mode)
14
V+
Positive supply. V + Is the positive line vol1age (from Tip & Ring)
through the polarity guard bridge. All sections Qf the KA2425A/B are
powered by V + .
15
Voo
Voo regulator. Voo Is the output of a shunt type regulator with a
nominal voltage of 3.3V. The nominal output current is Increased
from 550I'A to 2mA when dialing. Capacitor Cg stabilizes the
regulator and sustains the Voo voltage during pulse dialing.
~6
TI
Tone input. The DTMF signal from a dialer circuit Is input at TI
through an external resistor R7. The current at TI is amplified to drive
the line at V +. Increasing R7 will reduce the DTMF output levels.
The Input Impedance at TI is nominall 1.25KO.
17
MS
Mode select. This pin is connected through an internal 6OOKO
resistor to base of an NPN transistor. A logic "1" (>2.0V) selects
the pulse dialing mode. A logic "0" «0.3V) selects the tone dialing
mode.
18
Ml
Mute input for KA2425A. MT is connected through an internal 100KO
resistor to the base of a PNP transistor, with the emitter at Voo. A
logic "0" «1.0V) will mute the network for either pulse or tone
dialing. A logic "1" (>Voo -0.3V) puts the KA2425A into the speech
mode.
MT
c8
II
Mute input for KA2425B. MT Is connected through an internal 5OKO
to the base of a NPN transistor, with the collector to the base of a
PNP transistor. A logic "1" (>Voo-0.3V) will mute the network for
. either pulse or tone dialing. A logic "0" « 1.0V) puts the KA2425B
into the speech mode.
sAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
127
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA2425A1B
Fig. 1 Test Circuit
'Tip
0-------_
C8
2.0
~
Rlngo-----------
Rl
lOOK
R7
22K
DTMF Input >-.J\I\/v----J
Voo
Voo
Output---~-{15}---1r-----.J
C9
o.l;h
Mute>-----'~
Pulse/Tone
Select
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
128
KA2425A/B
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
Fig. 2 DTMF Driver Test
22K
v+
TI
400mVrms
1.0KHz
,+;
0.02
KA2425A1B
Iloop
LR
M'f
.:.1.0V
MS
1
LC
V-
47
I
Fig. 3 Transmit and Sidetone Level Test
0.05
VR
TXI
'---II1II11---1 EQ
Txe
v+
III
<
..,
8.2K
('II
~
LR
lo:
LC
c(
Voo
Mf
v-
Fig. 4 AC Impedance, Receive and Sidetone Cancellation Test
150K
v+
8.2K
STA
V+
0.05
RXI
33K
Rxe
10
'~f·~l
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
III
LR
..,<
~
lo:
f'
47
('II
0.2
hoop
6000
250mVrms (VS)
1,OKHz
129
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KS5805A1KS5805B
TELEPHONE PUlSE DIALER WITH REDIAL
The KS5805AJB is a monolithic CMOS integrated circuit and provide!j
all the features required for implementing a pulse dialer with redial.
18 DIP
I
FUNCTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Muie output logic "0"
Pulse output logic "0"
RC oscillation for reference frequency
Designed to operate directly from the telephone line
Used CMOS technology for low voltage, low power operation
PoWer up clear circuitry
KS580SA pin 2: V REF
KS5805B pin 2: Tone out
FEATURES
• Uses either a standard 2 of 7 matrix keyboard with negative true
common or the inexpensive form A·type keyboard
• Make/Break ratio can be selected
.• Redial with· or ff
• Continuous MUTE
.
• Tone signal output or on-chip reference Voltage by bonding option
on chip
• 10 ppS/20 pps can be selected
. TEST CIRCUIT
GND
vee
vee~~--------------------------~--------~--------,
1Mil
KS5805 AlB
66% Break
20pps
Fig. 1
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
10pps
130
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KSS80SAlKSs80SB
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta=25°C)
Characteristic
DC Supply Voltage
Voltage on Any Pin
Power Dissipation
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Symbol
Vee
Y'N
Po
Topr
Tstg
value
Unit
6.2
Vee +0.3. Gnd-0..3
SOO.O
-30-+60
-6S-+1S0
V
V
mW
"C
°C
II
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(T. =2SoC unless otherwise specified)
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
2.S
Max
Unit
V
Supply Voltage
Vee
Key Contact Resistance
RKI
1
KP
Keyboard Capacitance
CKI
30
pF
Key Input Voltage
K'H
K'l
2 of 7 input
mode
'6.01
0.8Vee
Vee
Gnd
O.2Vce
V
Key Pull-Up Resistance
K,Au
Vcc =6.0V
100
KO
Key Pull-Down Resistance
K'AD
V'N=4.8V
4.0
KO
Mute Sink Current
1M
Vee=2.SV
Vo=O.SV
Pulse Output Sink Current
Ip
Vce=2.SV
Vo=O.SV
Tone Output Sink Current
Irl
Vec=2.SV
Vo=O.SV
Tone Output Source Current
IrH
Vce=2.SV
Vo=O.SV
Memory Retention Current
Operating Current
3
2S0
JA
4
.2S0
JA
All outputs under
no load
100
0.001
IAEF
Vec-VAEF=6.0V
4
-
..
. lop
VAEF Output Source Current
Note 1)
2)
3)
4)
S)
6)
mA
1.0
0.7
Vcc =6.0V
Vo=6.0V
1
2
IMA
IlKG .
1
p.A
SOO
All outputs under
no load
Mute or Pulse Off Lelikage
Notes
1.0
7.0
p.A
1S0
1.0
6
p.A
JA
2,3
mA
S
Applies to key input pin. (R,-R•• C,-C 3)
Applies to MUTE output in.
Applies to J50rsE output pin.
Applies to TONE pin (KSS80S8)
Applies to VAEF pin (KSS80SA)
Current necessary for memory to be maintailled. All outputs unloaded .
• Typical values l!.re to be used as a design aid are not subject to production testing.
131
KS5805AIKS5805B
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
=
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ta 25°C)
Charactistic
Symbol
1\'p
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
Oscilator Frequency
Fose
4
KHz
1
Key Input Debounce Time
Toe
10
ms
3,4
Key Down Time for Valid Entry
TKO
40
ms
4,5
Key Down Time During
Two-Key Roll Over
tKR
5
ms
4
Oscillator Stat-Up Time (Vee =2.5V)
tos
1
Mute Valid After Last Outpulse
tMO
5
ms
3,4
Pulse Output Pulse Rate
PR
10
PPS
2
On-Hook Time Required to
Clear Memory
IoH
ms
4
Pre-Digital Pause
Tpop
800
ms
3,4
Inter-Digital Pause
T,op
800
ms
3,4
Frequency Stability .
Vee=2.5-3.5V
Af
±4
%
Frequency Stability Vee =3.5 - 6.0V
Af
±4
olb
Tone Output Frequency
FlONE
1
KHz
Note: 1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
300
ms
4,6
Rs=2MO, R=220KO, C=390pF.
If pin 10 is tied to Vee, the output pulse rate will be 20pps.
If the 20pps option is selected, the time will be 1/2 these shown.
These times are directly proportional to the oscillator frequency.
Debounce plus oscillator start-up time s 40ms.
If the 20pps option is selected, the tone output frequency will be 2KHz. (KS5805B ONLY)
. PIN CONNECTIONS·
Pin 1: Vee
Pin 2: Vref (KS5805A)/Pacifier tone (KS5805B)
Pin 3: Column 1
Pin 4: Column 2
Pin 5: Column 3
Pin6:GND
Pin 7: RC Oscillator
Pin 8: RC Oscillator
Pin 9: RC Oscillator
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
10/20pps Select
Make/Break Select
Mute Output
ROW 4
ROW 3
ROW 2
ROW 1
On-Hook/Test
Pulse Output
132
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KS5805AIKS5805B
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
Digit
Key Input
Digit
Redial
----~L2-Jr-----,~r-------------,~r--~--------------
Tone output
nnnn
-
Column scan
.-
(only KSS80SB)
. ---utrUlIUl- -soo'H;-----.IUl.J""LJlf -------:------uu----
Row scan
~-----------lIlfL..IlIl----------W-
o_n.HOOk input
~
MUTE output
_--l-!i---1!H!
r
1,
r
"'~.
PULSE output --I~-II-i!--~/
I
II'
I,
OSCoutput
(pin 8)
I
i
I
4KH
I I
~~l
II
Ii
II
---t ....... T08
I
i !I i
I
,I,
r+-H'fo------,
r---_,
I I
: I
~
I
I I
I
I:
II
1.r
1
I
.
I
'rin-----~*-- ______ L~+-~---------------------J.nr
110ms
On hook
r
n
I
TPDP 800ms
I
I
T8 1
TIOP
I!
I:
:
I
-t H- i ITMC':
--tl~rl I I
800ms
Normal dialing
l/PR
I ""
Off hook mode
I
:
I
II
Redial mode
Off hook mode
•
I
I
I
I
I.
:
I
I~
_
.
Test mode
Fig. 2
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
1. Vcc(Pin 1)
This is the positive supply pin. The voltage on this pin is measured relative to Pin 6 and is supplied from a 150pA current
source. This voltage muS! be regulated to less than 6.0 volts using on external form or regulation.
2. Tone signal outputNREF (Pin 2)
Tone signal out pin is CMOS comperementaly output and drive on external bipolar transistor. This pin generates a tone
signal when a key is depressed as its recognition. Tone signal frequency is 1KHz when 10pps pulse rate is selected. (the
frequency is 2KHz when 20pps pulse rate is selected). Only the pin 2 of KS5605A is VREF (on-chip reference voltage).
TYPICAL I-V CHARACTERISTICS
The VREF output provides a reference voltage that tracks internal
parameters of the KS5805A. VREF provides a negative voltage reference
to the Vee supply. Its magnitude will be approximately 0.6 volt greater
than the minimum operating voltage of each particular KS5805A
7.0
6.0
S.O
The typical application would be to connect the V REF pin to theGND pin
(Pin 6). The supply to the Vee pin (Pin 1) should then be regulated to
150pA (lop max). With this amount of supply current, operation of the
KS5805A is guaranteed.
IREF
MA
4.0
3.0
The internal circuit of the VREF function. is shown in Figure 3 with its
associated I-V characteristic.
2.0
VREF
1.0
vee
c8
1.0
-VREF
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
VOLTS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Fig. 3
133
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KS5805A1KS5805B
3. Keyboard inputs (Pin 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, 16,)
The KS5805AIB incorporates an innovative keyboard scheme that allows either the standard 2-of-7 keyboard with negative common or the inexpensive single contact (form A) keyboard to be used.
A valied key entry is defined by either a Single row being connected to a single column or GND being sjmutaneously
presented to both a Single row and column. When in the on-hook mode, the row and column inputs are held high and no
keyboard inputs are accepted.
When off-hook, the keyboard is completely static until the initial valid key input is sense<;l. The oscillator is,then enabled
and the rows and columns are alternateiy scanned (pulled high, then low) to verify the input is varied. The input must remain
valid continuously for 10msec of debounce time to be accepted .
• Form A type keyboard
• 2 of 7 keyboard (negative common)
------------~
COL
-.~----------
ROW '
G~'-----_______'·1.
~
COL
---------------ROW
• 2 of 7 keyboard
. - - - - - ".±~
COL
L-_______----A
••
~
• Electronic input
vcc
'H
- _.:.__-,-_-_-_..,_u
~-~-~-----.
____________
ROW
.vc_c____________,
~!?------------U
KEY BOARD CONFIGURATIONS
4. GND (Pin 6)
This is the negative supply pin and is connected to the common part in the general applications.
5. OSCILLATOR (Pins 7, 8, 9)
The KS5805AIB contains on-chip inverters to provide an oscillator which will operate with a minimum of external components.
FollOWing figure shOWS the on-Chip configuration with the necessary external components. Optimum stability occurs with
the ratio K=RsIR equal to 10.
'
The oscillator period is given by;
T=RC (1.386+(3.5KCs)IC-(±KI(K+1» In (K1(1.5K+0.5»
Where Cs is the stray capacitance on Pin 7.
Accuracy and stability will be enhanced with this capacitance minimized.
RS
+---U--------.-.1 8
C
KS5805 AlB
,R
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
,
I
134
KS5805AIKS5805B
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
6. 20/10 pps (Pin 10)
Connecting this pin to GND (pin 6) will select an output pulse rate of 10pps.
Connecting the pin Vee (pin 1) will select an output pulse rate of 20pps.
7. MAKE/I;IREAK (Pin 11)
The MAKE/BREAK pin controls the MAKE/BREAK ratio of the pulse output. The MAKE/BREAK ratio is controlled by con·
necting Vee or GND to this pin as shown in the following table.
Input
Make
Break
vee (Pin 1)
34%
66%
(Pin 6)
40%
60%
GND
II
8. MUTE OUTPUT (Pin 12)
The mute oiJtput is an open-drain N-channel transistor designed to drive an external bipolar transistor.
This circuitry is usually used mute the receiver during outpulsing. As shown in Fig. 2 the KS5805 mute output turns on
(pulls to the VGNo-supply) at the beginning of the predigital pause and turns off (goes to an open circuit) following the last
break.
The delay from the end of the last break until the mute output turns off is mute overlap and is specified as tMO.
9. ON-HOOKITEST (Pin 17)
The "ON-HOOK" or "Test" input of the KS580SA/B has a 100K{J pull~up to the positive supply. A Vee input or allowing the
pin to float sets the circuit in its on-hook or test mode while a VGND input sets it in the off-hook or normal mode. When off-hook
the KS5805AIB will accept key inputs and outputs the digits in normal fashion .. Upon completion of the last digit, the oscillator
is disabled and the circuit stands by for additional inputs.
Switching the KS5805AIB to on-hook while it is outpulsing causes the remaining digits to be outpulsed at 100x the normal rate (M/B ratio is then 50/50).
.
This feature provides a means of rapidly testing the device and is also on efficient method by which the circuitry is reset.
When the outpulsing in this mode, which can take up to 300msec, is completed, the circuit is deactivated and will require
only the current necessary to sustain the memory and power-up-clear detect ·ci.rcuitry (refer to the electrical specifications).
Upon retuning off-hook, a negative transistion on the mute output will insure the speech network is connected to the line.
If the first key entry is either a • or #, the number sequence stored on-Chip will be outpulsed. Any other valid key entrieS will
clear the memory and outpulse the new number sequence.
10. PULSE OUTPUT (Pin 18)
The pulse output is an open drain N-channel transistor designed to drive on external bipolar transistor. These transistor
would normally be used to pulse the telephone line by disconnecting and connecting the network. The KS5805AIB pulse
output is an open circuit during make and pulls to the GND supply during break.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
135
KS5806(DELETION)
. CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
TEN NUMBER REPERTORY DIALER
WITH PACIFIER TONE
18 DIP
The KS5806 is a monolithic integrated ten-number repertory dialer
manufactured using CMOS process. The circuit aCcepts keyboard inputs
and provides the pulse and mute logic levels required for loop disconnect signaling.
FEATURES
o Low-voltage (2
o
to 1OV) and low power operation
Low memory retention currant of 1II.
o Auto-dlals Ten 16 digit-numbers Including Last Number Dialed
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
(LND)
Pacifier Tone Output
Osclllstor Selectable In pulse mode (RC or ceramic resonator)
Stand-alone pulse dialer
PABX pause key Input
Last number dialed memory
Last number dialed may be copied Into any one of nine other
locations.
MakelBreak ratio Is pin selectabls in pulse mode
Uses slther the Inexpensive Form-A type keyboard or the stan.
dard 2·of·7 matrix keyboard with common Gnd
Optional use of 13th key Input to control repertory functions in
tone mode
/
Power up circuit Initializes RAM and logic
i
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
136
CMOS "INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KS5806 (DELETION)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
vee
18 J5UiM!113 KEY
STATIC
CMOS
RAM
DIGITDEMUX
}---------------~10r_--------~
HKS
GND
PACIFIER
TONE
DESCRIPTION
The KS580S is a ten-number repertory dialer manufactured using silicon Gate CMOS process. Pin 2, the "Mode select"
input determines whether "signaling will be pulse or tone. The interpretation of several inputs and outputs is dependent upon
the mOde selected.
.
In the pulse mode the time base for the circuit is selectable between a ceramic resonator and RC oscillator. In tone mode
the circuit can· only use the RC oscillator. An on chip RAM is capable of storing ten 1S-digit telephone numbers including
the laSt number dialed.
When used in a PABX system, a pause (# key) may be stored in the number sequence. The repertory dialer will recognize
this pause when automatically dialing and stop until another key input is received.
ciS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
137
II
KS5806 (DELETION)
'CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta =25°C)
Caracteristic
DC Supply Voltage
Maximum Power Dissipation (25°C)
Maximum Voltage on Any Pin
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperatu're
Symbol
Unit
value
10.5
500
Vee-l;O.3, GND-0.3
-30-60
-55-125
Vee
Po
Y,N
Topr
Tstg
.
V
mW
V
°C
°C
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta =25°C)
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Supply Voltage'
Vee
10.0
'V
Operating Current (Tone)2
lop
Vee=2.5V
50
100
pA
Operating Current (Pulse)2
lop
Vee=2.5V
100
200
pA
Standby Current (Vee =2,5V)3
ISB
No load
1.0
2.0
pA
Memory Retention Current'
1.0
pA.
2.0
IMR
0.3
Memory Retention Voltage'
VMR
1.3
1.5
V
Mute Sink CUffent'
IML
0.5
2.0
mA
mA
Vee=2.5V, Vo=0.5V
Pulse Sink Current'
Ip
Vee=2.5V, Vo=0.5V
1.0
4.0
Pacifier Tone Source/Sink'
IPT
Source Vo =2.OV
200
500
Mute and Pulse leakageS
ILKG
Vo=10V
0.001
pA
1.0
pA.
Key Contact Resistance6
RKI
1.0
KG
Keyboard Capacitance 6
CKI
30
pF
"0" LOgic Level
K,L '
GND
0.2Vee
V
"I" Logic Level
K'H
0.8 Vee
Vee
Keyboard Pull Up7
KRu
Keyboard Pull Down 7
KRo
CNT Pull Up (Pin 11)8
ReNT
Tone mode only
V
100
KG
1.0
KG
100
KG
Notes:
1. The memory will be retained at a lower voltage level than that required for circuit operation. If either IMR or VMR is
maintained the memory contents will not be cleared.
2. Operating current with a valid key input at 2.5 volts.
3 .. Standby current on hook or off hook with all inputs unloaded.
4. For V+ =2.5, Sink Vo =0.5 Volts, Source Vo =2.0 volts.
5. Leakage with V+, Vo=10.0 Volts
6. Keyb9ard contact resistance and parasitic capacitance, maximum values.,
. _ .
7. Keyboard 110 pins will scan 250 Hz with oscillator enabled pulse mode and dunng DD I"'tone mode.
8. Tone mode only.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
138
KS5806 (DELETION)
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ta=25°C)
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Typ
Oscillator (Cer, Res)'
FCR
480
Oscillator (RC)2
FRe
8
Oscillator Stability"
tlFRc
Debounce Time4
Toe
Valid Key Down Time
Oscillator Start
-3
Unit
16
KHz
KHz
+3
%
mS
32
40
TKO
Up Time
Max
mS
8
Tos
mS
Key Rollover OVLP Time 5
TRoL
Pulse Rate
PR
10
Break Time (Pin 11 VedGND)
Te
60/68
mS
Predigital Pause Times
Tpop
170
mS
Mute Overlap Time
TMoL
2
mS
Tone Rate
TR
5
TPS
mS
4
mS
PPS
Pacifier ToneBurst Time7
TPT
28
Pacifier Tone Frequency·
FPT
500
Hz
Interdigital Pause Time
T,op
940
mS
Notes:
1. Ceramic Resonator should 'have the tOtlowing equivalent values: R<20 Ohms. RA >70k Ohms, Co < 500pF.
2. The RC values chosen determine frequency. The nominal frequency is 8kHz. To accelerate dialing the frequency may
be increased to twice the nominal value. This would double signalling rate and half most timing specifications.
3. Voltage range of 2.5 to 6.0 volts, over temperature, and unit to unit variations.
4. Key entry must be present after 32 ms to be valid.
5. Rollover is the time key inputs must be invalid for successive entries to be recognized.
6. Time from initial key input till first break or tone output.
7. Tone burst will terminate if key released before 28 ms.
8. This is a square wave output.
PIN CONNECTION
vee - -
1
- '-
MOOE--.
2
--HKS
COL1--
3
Ccii2'--
4
COi:3--
5
PUL5E113KEY
--R0W2
KS5800
--R0W3
--i'IOWI
OSC/RC--
7
11
- - MB/CNTI.
OSC
SELECT - -
c8
9
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
- - PACIFIER lONE
139
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KS5806 (DELETION)
PIN DESCRIPTION
1.
VccCPln 1)
Pin 1 is the positive supply input to the part and is measured relative to GND (pin 6). The voltage on this pin should not
el«:eed 10 VoIIS. On chip Zener diodes will provide protection from supply transients In most applications. Alow voltage detect
circuit will perform a power up initialization whenever the supply voltage at thi!; pin falls below a level necessary to guarantee
proper circuit operation.
2. Mode (Pin 2)
The KS5806will function In either tone or pulse mode, dependent upon the logic level presented to pin 2. For pulse mode
operation, this pin must be tied to GND (pin 6). For tone mode, it should be tied to Vee (pin 1). The interpretation of pins
7,8;11,12, and 18 are dependent upon the mode selected.
3. Keyboard Inputs (Pins 3, 4, 5, 13, 14,
15; 16)
The KS5806 incorporates a keyboard scheme that allows either the standard 2-of-7 keyboard with negative common or
'
the inexpensive single-contact (Form A) keyboard to be used, as shown in Fig. 1.
A valid key entry is defined by either a single row being connected to single column or V - being simultaneously presented
to both a single row and column.
In the tone mode, the KS5806 features a bidirectional keyboard scheme. As the KS5806 passively monitors the key inputs
, (using the scan provided by the tone dialer), they are debounced, decoded, and stored in the on chip LND (last Number
Dialed) buffer. The keyboard inputs in tone mode are normally high impedance allowing the tone chip to scan the keyboard
lines and begin signaling immediately upon detecting a key entry. A command key entry disables the tone chip and scanning
is then controlled by the repertory dialer until the key is released. In tone mode auto- -10p.A
4.1
Voc·O.1
10H = - 400p.A
4.1
10H:!> -10p.A
Vee·0.1
IOH=1.6mA
-
0.8'
V
2.5
p.A
10
p.A
-
V
0.4
V
181
I
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
KS5824
DC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)
Characteristic
Output leakage
(Off State)
Cur~ent
C~nditlons
Symbol
Test
ILOH
VOH=VCC
CIN
VIN=OV, Ta=25°C,
f=1.0MHz
COUT
V,N =OV:Ta=25°C
f=1.0MHz
IRQ
Input Capacitance
Output Capacitance
RTS, Tx
Dat~
iRa
-
10
-
12.5
-
-
7.5
-
E= 1.0MHz
-
E= 1.5MHz
E=2.0MHz
E=1.0MHz
• Under transmitting and
receiving operation
• 500 kbps
• Data bus in Rm operation
Supply Current
E=1.5MHz
E=2.0MHz
• Chip is not selected
.500 kbps
• Under non transmitting
and receiving operation
• Input level (Except E)
VIH min = Vcc - 0.8V
VIL max = 0.8V
Icc
Typ Max Unit
,-
0 0 -0 7
E, Tx ClK, Rx ClK,
Rm, RS, Rx Data, CSo,
CS" CS2, CTS, DCD
Min
10
5.0
pA
pF
pF
3
4
-
5
-
200
-
-
250
-
-
300
mA
p.A
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Vcc=5.0V±5%,Vss =OV, Ta= -20-+75°C, unless otherwise noted.)
1. TIMING OF DATA TRANSMISSION
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Conditions
PWCL
Fig. 1
+1 Mode
Minimum Clock Pulse Width
,
+16, +64 Modes
+1 Mode
+16, +64 Modes
Clock Frequency
+1 Mode
+ 16, + 64 Modes
Min
,900
PWCH
Fig. 2
fc
600
900
600
ns
ns
ns
ns
KHz
800
KHz
-
600
ns
-
ns
1200
ns
trOD
Receive Data Setup Time
+1 Mode
tRoSU
Fig. 4
250
Receive Data Hold Time
+1 Mode
tRoH
Fig. 5
250
IRQ Release Time
tlR
Fig. 6
i1fS Delay Time
tRTS
Fig. 6
-
t" tl
500
Fig. 3
Except E
Unit
-
Clock-to-Data Delay for Transmitter
Rise Time and Fall Time
Max
ns
560
ns
1000'
ns
• 1.0p.s or 1Q% of the pulse width, whichever is smaller.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
182
KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
2. BUS TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
1) READ
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
-
ns
Enable Cycle Time
teycE
Fig. 7
Enable :'High" Pulse Width
PweH
Fig. 7
1000
450
Enable "Low" Pulse Width
PWEL
Fig. 7
430
Setup Time, Address and 'Rm Valid
to Enable Positive Transition
tAS
Fig. 7
80
ns
ns
ns
I
Data Delay Time
tOOR
Fig. 7
-
tli
Fig. 7
20
290
100
ns
Data Hold Time
Address Hold Time
tAH
Fig. 7
10
-
ns
te" te,
Fig. 7
-
25
ns
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
Max
Unit
·Enable Cycle Time
teyeE
Fig. 8
1000
PWEH
Fig. 8
-
ns
Enable "High" Pulse Width
Enable "Low" Pulse Width
""""'
ns
ns
ns
Rise and Fall Time for Enable Input
ns
2) WRITE
Characteristic
PWEL
Fig. 8
450
430
Setup Time, Address and RIW
Valid to Enable Positive Transition
tAS
Fig. 8
80
Data Setup Time
tosw
Fig. 8
165
Data Hold Time
tH
Fig. 8
tAH
Fig. 8
10
10
-
tE" te,
Fig. 8
-
25
Address Hold Time
Rise and Fall Time for Enable Input
PWCL
Tx ClK
OA
Ax ClK
Tx elK
OA
Ax ClK
ns
ns
ns
ns
2.2V
o.sv
PWCH
• Tx elK Is V'H=2.0V
Fig. 1 Clock Pulse Width, "Low" State
Fig. 2 Clock Pulse Width, "High" State
Tx elK
Ax DATA
Vcc-2.0V
O.4V
Fig. 3 Transmit Data Output Delay
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Ax elK _ _ _-'I
Fig. 4 Receive Data Setup Time (+ 1 Mode)
183
·KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
ENABLE
Rx ClK
Vcc- 2.OV
O.4V
.
i----tcycE----I
ENABLE
RS.CS.RIW
-FV;;
iRCl _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~/:...2.0V
Fig. 5 Receive Data Hold Time ( ... 1 Mode)
•. (1) i'RCi Release Time applied to Rx Data Register
read operation.
(2) IRQ Release Time applied to Tx Data Register
write ope~ation
(3) IRQ Release Time applied to control Register
write TIl: = 0, RIE = 0 operation.
•• IRQ Release Time applied to Rx Data Register
read operation right after read status register,
when IRQ is asserted by DCD rising edge.
Note: Note that following take place when IRQ is
asserted by the detection of transmit data register
empty status. IRQ is released to "High"
asynchronously with E signal when CTS goes
"High". (Refer to Figure 14)
DATA BUS
Fig. 6
Fig. 7 Bus Read Timing Characteristics
(Read information from UARn
lOAD A
(00-07.
f----tcycE - - - - - I
PWEH
m
Delay and
i1m
Release Time
(~~=1\Y)'5.0V
RiS. Tx DATA)
RL
=2.4KIl
3KIl
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
c
c= 130pF for 00-07
= 30pF for FITS and.IlLData
R 10KIl for 00-07. RTS and Tx Data
All diodes are lS2074@or Equivalent.
r"
=
Fig. 8 Bus Write Timing Characteristics
(Write information into UARn
c8SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Fig. 9 Bus Timing Test Loads
184
KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
START BIT
DO
01
02
f----------
03
04
05
06
PARITY
BIT
STOP
BIT
STOP
BIT
II
CHARACTER TIME @10CPS (11 BITS) 1 0 0 m s e c - - - - - - - - - - - i
Fig. 10 110 Baud Serial ASCII Data Timing
TRANSMIT
CLOCK 4
ENABLE 14
READIWRITE
CHIP SELECT 0
CHIP SELECT 1
CHIP SELECT 2
13
8
10
9
REGISTER SELECT 11-
CHIP
SELECT
AND
READI
WRITE
CONTROL
TRANSMIT
DATA
REGISTER
6 TRANSMIT
DATA
·24 CLEAR
TO SEND
DO
22
01
21
02
20
03
19
04
18
05
17
06
16
07
15
STATUS
REGISTER
7 INTERRUPT
REQUEST
DATA BUS
BUFFERS
23 DATA
CARRIER
DETECT
5 REQUEST
TO SEND
. CONTROL
REGISTER
RECEIVE·
DATA
REGISTER
Vcc=Pin 12
Vss=Pin 1
RECEIVE
CLOCK 3
RECEIVE
SHIFT
REGISTER
1------+-- 2 ~!~!IVE
-------------------t....::.~.:...J
Fig. 11 Expanded Block Diagram
c8
,
SAM$UNG SEMICONDUCTOR
185
KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
DEVICE OPERATION
transmitted (because of double buffering). The second
character will be automatically transferred into the Shift
Register when ·the first character transmission is
completed. This sequence continues until all the
characters have been transmitted.
At the bus interfl[lCe, the UART appears as two
addressable memory locations. Internally, there are four
registers: two read-only and two write-only registers. The
read-only registers are Status and Receive Data; the
write-only registers are Control and Transmit Data. The
serial interface consists of serial input and output lines
with independent clocks, and three peripheral/modem
control lines.
POWER ON/MASTER RESET
The master reset (CRO, CR1) should be set during
system initialization to insure the reset condition and
prepare for' programming the UART functional configuration when the communications channel is required.
During the first master reset, the IRQ and RTS outputs
are held at level 1. On all other master resets, the RTS
output can be programmed high or low with the IRQ
output held high. Control bits CR5 and CR6 should also
be programmed to define the state of RTS whenever
master reset is utilized. The UARTalso cQntains internal
power-on reset logic to detect the power line turn-on
transition and hold the chip in a reset state to prevent
'erroneous output transitions prior to initialization. This
circuitry depends on clean power turn-on tranSitions.
The power-on reset is released by means of the busprogrammed master reset which must be applied prior
to operating the UART. After master resetting the UART,
the programmable Control Register can be set for a
number of options such as variable clock divider ratios,
variable word length, one or two stop bits, parity (even,
odd, or none), etc.
TRANSMIT
A typical transmitting sequence consists of reading
the UART. Status Register either as a result of an
interrupt or in the UART's turn in a polling sequence.
A character may be written into the Transmit Data
Register if the status read operation has indicated that
the Transmit Data Register is empty. This character is
transferred to a Shift Register where it is serialized and
transmitted from the Transmit Data output preceded by
a start bit. and followed by one or two stop bits. Intemal
parity (odd or even) can be optionally added to the
character and will occur between the last data bit and
the first stop bit. After the first character is written in
the Data Register, the Status Register can be read again
to check for a Transmit Data Register Empty condition
and current peripheral status. If the register is empty,
another character can be loaded for transmission even
though the first character is in the process of being
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR'
RECEIVE
Data is received from a peripheral by means of the
Receive Data input. A divide-by-one clock ratio is
provided for an extemally synchronized clock (to its data)
while the divid-by-16 and 64 ratios are provided for
internal synchronization. Bit synchronization in the
divide-by-16 and 64 modes is initiated by the detection
of B or 32 low samples on the receive .Iine in the divideby-16 and 64 modes respectively. False start bit deletion
capability insures that a full half bit of a start bit has
been received before the internal clock is synchronized
to the bit time. As a character is being received, parity
(odd or even) will be checked and the error indication
will be available in the Status Register along with
framing error, overrun error, and Receive Data Register
full. In a typical receiving sequence, the Status Register
is read to determine if a character has been received
from a peripheral. If the Receiver Data Register is full,
the character is placed on the B-bit UART bus when a
Read Data command is received from the MPU. When
parity has been selected for a 7-bit word (7 bits plus
parity), the receiver strips the parity bit (07 0) so that"
data alone ia transferred to the MPU. This feature
reduces MPU programming. The Status Register can
continue to be read to determine when another
character is available in the Receive Data Register. The
receiver is also double buffered so that a character can
be read from 'the data register as another character is
being received in the shift register. The above sequence
continues u'ntil all characters have been received.
=
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
UART INTERFACE SIGNALS FOR MPU
The KS5B24 interfaces to the MPU with an B-bit
bidirectional data bus, three chip select lines, a register
select line, an interrupt request line, read/write line, and
enable line. These signals permit the MPU to have
complete control over the KS5824.
UART Bidirectional Data (00-07) - The bidirectional
data lines (00-07) allow for data transfer between the
KS5B24 and the MPU. The data bus output drivers are
three-state devices that remain in the high-impedance
(off) state except wh~n the MPU performs an UART read
operation.
.186
KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
UART Enable (E) - The Enable signal, E, is a highimpedance TTL-compatible input that enables the bus
input/output data buffers and clocks data to and from
the KS5824.
reading data or resetting the UART. Interrupts caused
by Overrun or loss of DCD are cleared by reading the
status register after the error condition has occurred and
then reading the Receive Data Register or resetting the
UART. The receiver interrupt is masked by resetting the
Receiver Interrupt Enable.
ReadlWrite (R/W) - The ReadlWrite line is a highimpedance input that is TTL compatible and is used to
control the direction of data flow through the UART's
input/output data bus interface. When ReadlWrite is high
(MPU Read cycle), KS5824 output drivers are tumed on
and a selected register is read. When it is low, the
KS5824 output drivers are turned off and the MPU writes
into a selected register. Therefore, the ReadlWrite signal
is used to select read-only or write-only registers within
the KS5824.
Chip Select (CSO, CS1, CS2) - These three highimpedance TTL-compatible input lines are used to
address the KS5824. The KS5824 is selected when CSO
and CS1 are high and CS2 is low. Transfers of ,data to
and from the KS5824, are then performed under the
, control of the Enable Signal, ReadlWrite, and Register
Select.
Register Select (RS) - The Register Select line is a
high-impedance input that is TTL compatible. A high
level is used to select the Transmit/Receive Data
Registers and a low level the Control/Status Registers.
The ReadlWrite signal line is used in conjunction with
Register Select to select the read-only or write-only
register in each register pair.
Interrupt Request (IRQ) - Interrupt Request is a TTLcompatible, open-drain (no internal pull up), active low
output that is used to interrupt the MPU. The IRQ output
remains low as long as the cause of the interrupt is
present and the appropriate interrupt enable within the
UART is set. The IRQ status bit, when high, indicates
the IRQ output is in the active state.
Interrupts result from conditions in both the
transmitter and receiver sections of the UART. The
transmitter section causes an interrupt when the
Transmitter Interrupt Enabled condition is selected
(CR5 o CR6), and the Transmit Data Register Empty
(TORE) status bit is high. The TORE status bit indicates
the current status of the Transmitter Data Register
except when inhibited by Clear-to-Send (CTS) being high
or the UART being maintained in the Reset condition.
The interrupt is cleared by writing data into the Transmit
Data Register. The interrupt is masked by disabling the
Transmitter Interrupt via CR5 or CR6 or by the loss of
CTS which inhibits the TORE status bit. The Receiver
section causes an interrupt when the Receiver Interrupt
, Enable is set and the Receive Data Register Full (RDRF)'
status bit is high, an Overrun has occurred, or Data
Carrier Detect (DCD) has gone high. An interrupt
resulting from the RDRF status bit can be cleared by
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
CLOCK INPUTS
Separate high-impedance TTL-compatible inputs are
provided for clocking of transmitted and received data.
Ciock frequencies of 1, 16, or 64 times the data rate may
be selected.
Transmit Clock (Tx ClK) -The Transmit Clock input
is used for the clocking of transmitted data. The
transmitter initiates data on the negative transition of
the clock.
Receive Clock (Rx ClK) - The Receive Clock input
is used for synchronization of received data (In the + 1
mode, the clock and data must be synchronized
extemally.) The receiver samples the data on the positive
trans,ition of the clock.
SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT LINES
Receive Data (Rx Data) - The Receive Data line is
a high-impedance TTL-compatible input through which
data is received in a serial format. Synchronization with
a clock for detection of data Is accompiished internally
when clock rates of 16 or 64 times the bit rate are used.
Transmit Data (Tx Data) - The Transmit Data output
line transfers serial data to a modem or other peripheral.
PERIPHERAUMODEM CONTROL
The UART includes several functions that permit
limited control of a peripheral or modem. The functions
included are Clear-to-Send, Request-to-Send and Data
Carrier Detect.
Clear-ta-Sand (CTS) - This high-impedance TTLcompatible input provides automatic control of the
transmitting end of a communications link via the
modem Clear-to-Send active low output by inhibiting the
Transmit Data Register Empty (TORE) status bit.
Request:to-Sand (RTS) - The Request-to-Send output
enables the MPU to control a peripheral or modem via
the data bus. The FITS; output corresponds to the state
of the Control Register bits CR5 and CR6. When CR6 = 0
or both CR5 and CR6 1, the RTS output is low (the
active state). This output can also be used for Data
Terminal Ready (DTR).
=
187
II
KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
Data Carrier Detect (!)CO) - This high-impedance
TIl-compatible input provides automatic control, such
as in the receiving end of a communications link by
means of a m9dem Data Carrier Detect output. The DCD '
input rnhibits and initializes the receiver section of the
UART when high. A low-to-high transition of the Data
Carrier Detect initiates an interrupt to the MPU to
indicate the occurrence of a loss of carrier when the
Receive Interrupt Enable bit is set. The Rx ClK must
be running for proper DCD operation.
character is being transmitted, then the transfer will take
place within 1-bit time of the training edge of the Write
command. If a character is being transmitted, the new
data character will commence as soon as the previous
character is complete. The transfer of data causes the
Transmit Data Register Empty (TORE) bit to indicate
empty.
RECEIVE DATA REGISTER (RDR)
Data is automatically transferred to the empty Receive
'Data Register (RDR) from the receiver deserializer (a
shift register) upon receiving a complete character. This
event causes the Receive Data Register Full bit (RDJ:lF)
in the status buffer to go high (full). Data may then be
read through the bus by addressing the UART and
selecting the Receive Data Register with RS and RIW
high when the UART is enabled. The non-destructive
read cycle causes the RDRF bit to be cleared to empty
although the data is retained in the RDA. The status is
maintained by RDRF as to whether or not the data is
current. When the Receive Data, Register is full, the '
automatic transfer of data from the Receiver Shift
Register to the Data Register is inhibited and the RDR
contents remain valid with its current status stored in
the Status Register.
UART REGISTERS
The expanded block diagram for the UART indicateS
the Internal registers on the chip that are used for the
status, control, receiving, and'transmitting of data ThEi
content of each of the registers is summarized in Table
1.
TRANSMIT DATA REGISTER (TOR)
Data is written in the Transmit Data Register during
the negative transition of the enable (E) when the UART
has been addressed with RS high and RiW low. Writing
data into the register caul$es the Transmit Data Register
Empty bit in the Status Register to go low. Data can then
I:;le transmitted. If the transmitter is idling and no
DEFINITION OF UART REGISTER CONTENTS
Buffer Address
RS. RiW
Transmit
Data
Register
RS. RIW
Receive
Data
Register
(Write Only)
0
Data
Bus
Line
Number
RS.
iWi
RS.
RiW
Control
Register
Status
Register
(Read Only)
(Write Only)
(Read Only)
Data Bit 0'
Data Bit 0
Counter Divide
Select ,1 (CR1)
Receive Data Register
Full (RDRF)
1
Data Bit 1
Data Bit 1
Counter Divide
Select 2 (CR1)
Transmit Data Register
Empty (TORE)
2
Data Bit 2
Data Bit 2
Word Select 1
(CR2)
Data Carrier Detect
(DCD)
3
Data Bit 3
Data Bit 3,
Word Select 2
(CR3)
Clear-to-Send
(CTS)
4
Data Bit 4
Data Bit 4
Word Select 3
(CR4)
Framing Error
(FE)
5
Data Bit 5
Data Bit 5
Transmit Control 1
(CR5)
Receiver Overrun
(OVRN)
6
Data Bit 6
Data
Bit 6
Transmit Control 2
(CR6)
Parity Error (PE)
7
Data Bit 7'"
Receive Interrupt
Enable (CR7)
Interrupt Request
(IRQ)
Data Bit 7"
• leadmg bit = lSB = Bit 0
" Data bit will be zero in 7 bit plus parity modes
, •• Data bit is "don't care" in 7 bit plus parity modes.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
188
KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
CONTROL REGISTER
The UART Control Register consists of eight bits of
write-only buffer that are selected when RS and R/W are
low. This register controls the function of the receiver,
transmitter, interrupt enables, and the Request-to-Send
peripheral/modem control output.
Counter Divide Select Bits (CRG and CR1) - The
Counter Divide Select Bits (CRO and CR1) determine the
divide ratios utilized in both the transmitter and receiver
sections of the UART. Additionally, these bits are used
to provide a master reset for the UART which clears the
Status Register (except for external conditions on CTS
and DC D) and initializes both the receiver and
transmitter. Master reset does not affect other Control
Register bits. Note that after power-on or a power
fail/restart, these bits must be set high to reset the
UART. After resetting, the clock divide ratio may be
selected. These counter select bits provide for the
follo~ing clock divide ratios:
CR1
CRO
Function
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
+1
+16
+64
Master Reset
Word Select Bits (CR2, CR3, and CR4) - The Word
Select bits are used to select word length, parity, and
the number of stop bits. The encoding format is as
follows;
Function
CR4 CR3 CR2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
Bits + Even Parity + 2 Stop Bits
Bits + Odd Parity + 2 Stop Bits
Bits + Even Parity + 1 Stop Bit
Bits Odd Parity +1 Stop Bit
Bits + 2 Stop Bits
Bits + 1 Stop Bit
Bits + Even Parity + 1 Stop Bit
Bits + Odd Parity + 1 Stop Bit·
+.
Word length, Parity Select, and Stop Bit changes are
not buffered and therefore become effective
immediately.
Transmitter Control Bits (CRS and CR6) - Two
Transmitter Control bits provide for the control of the
interrupt from the Transmit Data Register Empty
condition, the Request-to-Send (RTS) output, and the·
transmission of a Break level (space). The following
encoding format is used: .
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
CR6
CRS
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Function
=
=
=
=
RTS low, Transmitting interrupt
Disabled.
RTS low, Transmitting Interrupt
Enabled.
RTS high, Transmitting Interrupt
Disabled.
RTS low, Transmits Break level on
the Transmit Data Output.
Transmitting Interrupt Disabled.
Receive Interrupt Enable Bit (CR7) - The following
interrupts will be enabled by a high level in bit position
7 of the Control Register (CR?): Receive Data Register
Full Overrun or a low·to-high transition on the Data
Carrier Detect (DCD) signal line.
STATUS REGISTER
Information on the status of the UART is available to
the MPU by reading the UART Status Register. This readonly register is selected when RS is low and RiW
is high. Information stored in this register indicates the
status of the Transmit Data Register, the Receive Data
Register and error logic, and the peripheral/modem
status inputs of the UART.
Receive Data Register Full (RDRF), Bit 0 - Receive
Data Register Full indicates that received data has been
transferred to the Receive Data Register. RDRF is
cleared after an MPU read of the Receive Data. Register
or by a master reset. The cleared or empty state
indicates that the contents of the Receive Data Register
are not current. Data Carrier Detect being high also
causes RDRF to indicate empty.
Transmit Qata Register Empty (TORE), Bit 1 - The
Transmit Data Register Empty bit being set high
indicates that the Transmit Data Register contents have
been transferred and that new data may be entered. The
low state indicates that the register is full and that
transmission of a new character has not begun since
the last write data command.
Data Carrler'Detect (DCD), Bit 2 - The Data Carrier
Detect bit will be high when the DCD input from a
modem has gone high to indicate that a carrier is not
present. This bit going high causes and Interrupt
Request to be generated when the Reoeive Interrupt
Enable is set. It remains high after the DCD input is
returned low until cleared by first reading the Status
Register and then the Data Register or until a master
reset occurs. If the DCD input remains high after read
189
II
<
KS5824
CMOS INTERGRATED CIRCUIT
status and read data or master reset has occurred, the
interrupt is cleared, the DCD status bit remains high and
will follow the DCD Input.
in succession without a read of the RDR having
occurred. The Overrun does not occur in the Status
Register until the valid character prior to Overrun has
been read. The RDRF bit remains set until the Overrun
is reset. Character synchronization is mai~tained during
the Overrun condition. The Overrun indication is reset
after the reading of data from the Receive Data Register
or by a Master Reset.
Clear·to-5end"(CTS), Bit 3 - The Clear·to-Send bit
indicates the state of the Clear·to-Send input from a
modem. A low CfS indicates that there is a Clear·toSend from the mod~m. In the high state, the Transmit
Qata Register Empty bit Is inhibited and the Clear·toSend status bit will be high. Master reset does not affect
the Clear·to-Send status bit.
Framing Error (FE), Bit 4 - Framing error Indicates
that the received character is Improperly' framed by a
start and a stop bit and is detected by the absence of
the first stop bit. This error indlcate"s a synchronization
error, faulty transmission, or a break condition. The
framing error flag Is set or reset during the receive data
transfer time. Therefore, this error indicator is present
throughout the time that the associated character is
available.
Receiver Overrun (OVRN), Bit 5 - Overrun is an error
flag the indicates that one or more characters in the data
stream were lost. That is, a character or a number of
characters were received but not read from the Receive
Data Register (RDR) prior to subsequent characters
being received. The overrun condition begins at the"
midpoint of the last bit of the second character received
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Parity Error(PE), Bit 6 - The parity error flag indicates
that the number of highs (ones) in the character does
not agree with the preselected odd or even parity. Odd
parity is defined to be when the total number of ones
is odd. The parity error indication will be present as long
as the data character Is in the RDR. If no parity is
selected, then both the transmitter parity generator
output and the receiver parity check results are
inhibited.
Interrupt Request (IRQ), Bit 7 - The IRQ bit indicates
the state of the IRQ output. Any interrupt condition with
its applicable enable will be indicated in this status bit.
Anytime the IRQ output is low the IRQ bit will be high
to indicate the interrupt or service request status. IRQ
is cleared by a read operation to the Receive Qata
Register or a write operation to the Transmit Data
Register.
190
KT3040J
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
PCM MONOLITHIC FILTER.
The KT3040J filter is a monolithic circuit containing both transmit and
receive filters specifically designed for PCM CODEC filtering applications
in 8KHz sampled systems ..
16 CERDIP
The filter is manufactured using double-poly Si-Gate CMOS
technology. Switched capacitor integrators are used to simulate classical
LC ladder filters which exhibit low component sensitivity.
Transmit Filter Stage
The transmit filter is a fifth order elliptic low pass filter in series with
a fourth order Chebyshev high pass filter. It provides a flat response in
the passband and rejection of signals below 200Hz and above 3.4KHz.
II
Receive Filter Stage
The receive filter is a fifth order elliptic lowpass filter designed to
reconstruct the voice signal from the decoded/demultiplexed signal
which, as a result of the sampling process, is a stair-step signal havirig
the inherent sin XiX frequency response. The receive filter approximates
the function required to compensate for the degraded frequency
response and restore the flat passband response.
FEATURES
• Exceeds all 03/04 and CCITT specifications
• + 5V, - 5V power supplies
'
• Low power consumption: 45mW (0 dBmO into 6000)
30mW (power amps disabled)
• Power down mode: 0_5mW
• 20 dB gain adjust range
• No extemal anti-aliasing components
• Sin xix correction In receive filter
• 5OI6OHz rejection in transmit filter
• TTL and CMOS compatible logic
• All inputs protected against static discharge due to handling
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCT()R
191
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3040J
BLOCK DIAGRAM
PDN
GNDA
' GNDD
PWRI
Vee
CLK
CLKO
VFXO
GSx
Fig. 1
PIN CONFIGURATION
GNDA
CLKO
PDN
KT3040J
~~
VFRI
9J
Vee
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Value
Supply Voltages
Vs
±7
V
Power Dissipation
Po
1
W/PKG
Input Voltage
VIN
±7
V
Continuous
sec
+ 125
-65 to + 150
·C
Chllracterlstlcs
Output Short-Circuit Duration
Ts.e OUT
Operating Temperature Range
Ta
Storage Temperature
T.'g
TL
Lead Temperature (Soldering 10 seconds)
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
-25 to
300
Unit
·C
·C
192
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3040J
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Unless otherwise noted, Ta = O·C to 70·C, Vee = + 5.0V ± 5%, Vee = - 5.0V ± 5%, clock frequency is 2.048MHz.
Typical parameters are specified at Ta= 25·C, Vee = +5.0V, Vee = - 5.0V, digital interface voltages measured with
respect to digital ground, GNDD. Analog voltages measured with respect to analog ground, GNDA.)
Characteristic
Synibol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Power Dissipation
Vee Standby Current
leeo
PDN=Voo
400
".A
Vee Standby Current
leBO
PDN=Voo
400
p.A
Vee Operating Current
leel
PWRI = Vee, Power Amp
Inactive
3.0
.4.0
mA
Vee Operating Current
'l ee1
PWRI = Vee, Power Amp
Inactive
3.0
4.0
mA
Vee Operating Current
lee2
(Note 1)
4.6
6.4
mA
Vee Operating Current
leB2
(Note 1)
4.6
6.4
mA
Input Current, CLK
liNe
VeeSVINSVee
-10
10
".A
Input Current, PDN
IINP
VeeSVINSVee
-100
Input Current, CLKO
IINo
VeeSVINSVee - 0.5V
-10
-0.1
".A
0.8
V
Vee
V
Digital Interface
Input Low Voltage, CLK, PDN
".A
Vil
0
Input High Voltage, CLK, PDN
VIH
2.2
Input Low Voltage, CLKO
VllO
Vee
Input Intermediate Voltage, CLKO
VIIO
-0.8
0,8
V
Input High Voltage, CLKO
VIHO
Vee·0.5
Vee
V
VeeSVFxlSVee
-100
100
VeeSVFxlSVee
10
Vee+ 0.5 '
V
Transmit Input OP Amp
Input Leakage Current, VFXI
lexl
Input ReSistance, VFXI
Rixi
Input Offset Voltage, VFXI
VOSXI
Common Mode Range, VFXI
VCM
Common Mode Rejection Ratio
CMRR
Power Supply Rejection of Vee or Vee
PSRR
Open Loop Output Resistance, ·Gsx
-2.5VSVINS +2.5V
-2.5VsVINS +2.5V
-20
20
-2.5
2.5
80
Minimum Load ReSistance, Gsx
Rl
Maximum Load Capacitance, Gsx
Cl
±2.5
Open Loop Voltage Gain, Gsx
Avol
Rl~10K
5\000.
c8
Fc
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
KIl
100
Rl~10K
Open Loop Unity Gain Bandwidth, Gsx
KIl
10
VOXI
V
dB
1
Output Voltage Swing, Gsx
mV
dB
60
ROl
nA
Mil
pF
V
VN
2
MHz
193
I
KT3040J
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Unless otherwise specified, Ta = 25°C. All parameters are specified for a signal level of OdBmO at 1KHz. The
OdBmO level is assumed to be 1.54 Vrms measured at the output, of the transmit or receive filter.)
Symbol
Characterlst.ic
Min
Test Condition
Typ
Max
Unit
TRANSMIT FILTER (Transmit filter input OP amp set to the non-Inverting unity gain mode,
with V,xl-1.09 Vrme unless otherwise noted.)
Minimum Load Resistance, V,xo
RLX
Load Capacitance, V,xo
CLX
Output Resistance, V,xo
- 2.5V < VOUT <2.5V
3
KO
-3.2VO,1~F
I
600
I
8
VFXI
VFXO
I
DIGITAl.
OUTPUT
50K
I
KT5116
KT3040J
I
I
I
GNDA
PWAO-
I
I
I
VFA1
60011
I
10
12
13
VFAO
O,1~F
I
50K
DIGITAL
INPUT
L-------'--~
Fig. 2
Note 1: Transmit voltage gain
Note 2: Receive Gai n
=R';2 R2 x v'2 (The filter itself introduces a 3dB gain), (R, + R2~ HiK)
=R3+R4R4 (R3 + R4 ~ 10K)
Note 3: In the configuration shown, the receive filter amplifiers will drive a 6000 T to R tennination to a maximum
signal level of B.5dBm. An alternative arrangement, using a transformer winding ratio equivalent to 1.414:1
and 3000 lesistor, Rs, will provide a maximum signal level of 10.1dBm across a 6000 termination
impedance.
Gain Adjust
Fig. 2 shows the signal path interconnections between the KT3040 and KT5116 single-channel CODEC. The trans!11it
RC coupling components have been chosen both for minimum passband droop and to present the correct impedance
to the CODEC during sampling.
'
. Optimum noise and distortion perfonnance will be obtained from the KT3040 filter when operated with system
peak overload voltages of ±2.5 to ±3.2V at VFXO and VFAO• When interfacing to a PCM CODEC with a peak
'
overload voltage outside this range, further gain or attenuation may be required.
For example, the KT3040 filter can be used with the KT3000 series CODEC which has a 5.5V peak overload voltage.
A gain stage following the transmit filter output and an attenuation stage following the CODEC output are required.
Board Layout
Care must be taken in PCB,layout to minimize power supply and ground noise. Analog ground (GNDA) of each filter
should be connected to digital ground (GNDD) at a single point, which should be bypassed to both power supplies.
Further power supply decoupling adjacent to each filter and CODEC is recommended. Ground loops should be
avoided, both between GNDA and GNPD a~d between the 'GNDA traces of adjacent filters and CODECs.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
199
I
KT3054J
COMBO CODEC·
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
18 CERDIP
The KT3054 consists of ,..Iaw· monolithic PCM
CODEC/FILTERS utilizing the AID and DIA conversion
and a serial PCM interface. The devices are fabricated
using double-poly CMOS process C/£-process). The
encode portion of each device consists of an input
gain adjust amplifier, an active RC prefilter which
eliminatesNery high frequency noise prior to entering
a switched-capacitor band-pass filter that rejects
signals below 200Hz and above 3.400Hz.
Also Included are auto-zero circuitry and a companding
coder which samples the filtered signal and encodes
it in the companded ,..Iaw PCM format. The decode
portion of each device consists of an expanding
decoder, which reconstructs the analog signal from
the companded ,..Iaw code. a low-pass filter which
corrects for the sin xix response of the decoder output
and rejects signals above 3,400Hz and is followed by
a single-ended power amplifier capable of driving low
impedance loads.
The devices require two 1.536MHz. 1.544MHz or
2.048MHz transmit and receive master clocks, which
may be asynchronous; transmit and receive bit clocks,
which may vary from 64KHz to 2.048MHz; and transmit
and receive frame sync pulses. The timing of the frame
sync pulses and PCM data is compatible with both
industry standard formats ..
FEATURES
• Complete CODEC and filtering system (COMBO)
Including;.
-:- Transmit high-Pass and low-pass filtering
- Receive low-pass filter with sin xix correction
- ,..Iaw compatible COder and DECoder.
- Internal precision voltage reference
- Active RC noise filters
- Serial I/O interface
- Internal auto-zero circuitry
• ,..Iaw without signaling
• Meets or exceeds all DJD. and CCITT
specifications
.
• Low operating power: typically 60mW
• Power-down standby mode: typically 3mW .
• Automatic power-down
• :!: 5V operetlon
• TTL or CMOS compatible digital interfaces
• Maximizes line interface card circuit density
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONolJCTOR
200
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
R2
R1
ANALOG IN
II
TIMING AND
CONTROL
+5V
-5V
,--'
a:w
:0::",
--':0::
0--,
60dB
2'
pF
MHz
mV
V
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio
CMRRXA DC Test
60
dB
Power Supply Rejection Ratio
PSRRXA DC Test
60
dB
Analog Interface with Receive Filter
Out out Resistance
RoRF
.Load Resistance
RLRF
Load Capacitance
CLRF
Output DC Offset Voltage
Pin VFRO
VFRO= ±2.5V
1
3
600
500
VOSRO,
0
0,
pF
200 . mV
-200
Power Dissipation
Power-Down Current
·lccO
No Load
0.5
1.5
mA
Power-Down Current
leeO
No Load
0.05
0.3
mA
Active Current
Icc1
No Load
6.0
9.0
rnA
Active Current
lee1
No Load
6.0
9.0
rnA
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
202
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristic
Frequency of Master Clocks
Symbol
Test Condition
l/tPM
Depends on the device used and the
BClK~ClKSEl Pin.
MClKx and MClKR
Min
Typ
Max
1.536
1.544
2.048
Unit
MHz
MHz
MHz
Width of Master Clock High
tWMH
MClKx and MClKR
. 160
ns
Width of Master Clock low
. tWML
MClKx and MClKR.
160
ns
Rise Time of Master Clock
tRM
MCLKx and MClKR
50
ns
Fall Time of Master Clock
tFM
MClKx and MClKR
50
ns
Set-Up Time from BClKx High
(and FSx in long Frame Sync
Mode) to MClKx Falling Edge
Period of Bit Clock
tSSFM
First bit clock after the leading
edge of FSx
tps
100
485
ns
488
15,725
ns
Width of Bit Clock High
tWSH
VIH=2.2V
160
Width of Bit Clock low
tWBL
V1L =0.6V
160
ns
Rise Time of Bit Clock
tRS
tps = 488ns
50
ns
Fall Time of Bit Clock
tFS
tps =488ns
50
ns
Holding Time from Bit Clock
low to Frame Sync
tHsFL
long frame only
0
ns
Holding Time from Bit Clock .
High to Frame Sync
tHOLD
Short frame only
0
ns
Set-Up Time from Frame Sync
to Bit Clock low
tSFS
long frame only
80
ns
Delay Time from BClKx High
10 Dala Valid
tDSD
load = 150pF plus 2 lSTTl loads
0
load = 150pF plus 2 lSTTl loads
ns
180
ils
140
ns
50
165
ns
20
165
ns
Delay Time to TSx low
tXDP
Delay Time from BClKx low to
Data Oulpul Disabled
IDzc
Delay Time to Valid Data from
FSx or BClKx,Whlchever
Comes later
IDzF
Set-Up Time from DR Valid to
BClKRIX low
tSDS
50
ns
Hold Time from BClKRIX low to
DR Jnvalid
IHsD
50
ns
Delay Time from BClKRIX low
10 SIGR Valid
Set-Up Time from FSXlR 10
BClKXIR low .
.c8
tOFSSG
ISF
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
CL=OpF 10 150pF
load = 50pF plus 2 lSTTl loads
Short frame sync pulse (lor 2 bit
clock periods long) (Note 1) ,
I
50
300
ns
ns
203
I
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristic
(Continued)
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Hold Time from BCLKXIR Low
to FSXlR Low
tHF
Short frame sync pulse (1 or 2 bit
clock periods long) (Note 1)
100
ns
Hold Time from 3rd Period of
Bit Clock Low to Frame Sync
(FSx or FS R)
tHBFI
Long frame sync pulse (from 3 to
8 bit clock periods long)
100
ns
Minimum Width of the Frame
Sync Pulse (Low Level)
tWFL
64K bitls operating mode
160
ns
Note 1: For short frame sync timing. FSx and FSR must go high while their respective bit clocks are high.
TIMING DIAGRAM
TSx
-:--------t\
MCLKR
MCLKx
BCLKX
FSx _ _ _ _--'T
SIGx
Dx---------~
tSDB
tHBD
tHBD
Fig. 2. Short Frame Sync Timing
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR,
204
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
TIMING DIAGRAM
FSX
(Continued)
----=
f--------tSSFB+-------i
I
tHBSF
SFX __________~~+---S-I-G-N-A-Ll-N-G-F-R-A-M-E--~--------------------~--------____~+_--~--~------
----- ,---,
\
\
tSSFF
f------++---tSSFB--------i
SFR
SIGNALING FRAME
----------------------~------_H--------------------~--+_------tSDB
tHBD
tHBD
SIGR.
------------------------------------------------------------------------~~----Fig. 3 Long Frame Sync Timing
c8
SAMSUNGSEMICONDUCTOR
205
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
·KT3054J
TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
(Unless otherwise specifiEld: Ta=O·C to 70·C, Vcc=5V±5%, Vaa= -5V±5%, GNDA=OV, f=1.02KHz,
VIN = OdBmO, transmit Input amplifier connected for unity:galn non-inverting.)
.
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Symbol
Test Condition
AL
Nominal OdBmO level is 4dBm (6000)
OdBmO·
1.2276
Vrms
.2.501
VPK
Amplitude Response
Absolute Levels
Max Overload Level
tMAX
Max overload level (3.17dBmO)
Transmit Gain, Absolute
GXA
Ta=25·C, Vcc =5V, Vaa = -5V·
Input at GSx = OdBmO at 1Q20Hz
Transmit Gain, Relative to GXA
GXR
f=16Hz
f=50Hz
f=60Hz
f=200Hz
f = 300Hz - 3000Hz
f=33OOHz
f=3400Hz
f=4000Hz
f = 4600Hz and up, measure
response. from OHz to 4000Hz
Absolute Transmit Gain Variation
with Temperature
GXAT
Absolute Transmit Gain Variation
with Supply Voltage
GXAV
Transmit Gain Variations with .
Level
Sinusoidal test method
Reference level = -10dBmO
GXRL · VFxl + = - 4OdBmO to + 3dBmO
VFxl + = -5OdBmOto -40 dBmO
VFxl + = - 55dBmO to - 5OdBmO
Receive Gain, Absolute
GRA
Ta=25·C, Vcc =5V, Vea= -5V
Input = Digital code sequence for
OdBmO signal at 1020Hz
Receive Gain, Re·lative to GRA
GRR
f = OHz to 3000Hz
f=33OOHz
f=3400Hz
f=4000Hz
Absolute Receive Gain Variation
with Temperature
GRAT
Absolute Receive Gain Varlation
with Supply Voltage
GRAv
Re.ceive Gain Variations with
Level
GRRl
Receive Output Drive Level
VRO
c8
-0.15
0.15
dB
-40
-30
-26
-0.1
0.15
0.05
0
-14
-32
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
Ta = O·C to 70·C
±0.1
dB
Vcc=5V±5%, Vaa= -5V±5%
±0.05
dB
-0.2
-0.4
-1.2
0.2
0.4
1.2
dB
dB
dB
-0.15
0.15
dB
-0.15
-0.35
-0.7
0.15
0.05
0
-14
dB
dB
dB
dB
Ta = O·C to 70·C
±0.1
dB
Vcc=5V±5%, Vea= -5V±5%
±0.05
dB
0.2
0.4
1.2
dB
dB
dB
2.5
V
-1.8
-0.15
-0.35
-0.7
. Sinusoidal test method; reference
input PCM code corresponds to an
Ideally encoded-10dBmO signal
PCM level = - 40dBmO to + 3 dBmO -0.2
PCM level = -5OdBmO to -40dBmO -0.4
PCM level = - 55dBmO to - 5OdBmO -1.2
Rl =6001l
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
-2.5
206
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristic
(Continued)
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Envelope Delay Distortion with Frequency
Transmit Delay, Absolute
OleA
f= 1600Hz
290
315
ILs
Transmit Delay, Relative to DXA
DXR
f = 500Hz - 600Hz
f = 600Hz - 600Hz
f = 800Hz - 1000Hz
f = 1000Hz -1600Hz
f = 1600Hz - 2600Hz
f = 2600Hz - 2800Hz
f 2800Hz - 3000Hz
195
120
50
20
55
80
130
220
145
75
40
75
105
155
ILS
ILs
ILS
ILS
ILs ILs
ILS
Receive Delay, Absolute
ORA
f= 1600Hz
180
200
ILs
ORR
f = 500Hz - 1000Hz
f = 1000Hz - 1600Hz
f = 1600Hz - 2600Hz
f = 2600Hz - 2800Hz
f = 2800Hz - 3000Hz
90·
125
175
ILS
ILs
ILS
ILs
ILs
Transmit Noise, C Message
Weighted
Nxe
VFxl+ =OV
12
15
d8rnCD
Receive Noise, C Message
Weighted
NRC
PCM code equals alternating
positive and negative zero
8
11
dBrnCD
Noise, Single Frequency
NRS
f=OKHz to 100KHz, loop around
measurement, VFxl + = OVrms
=
Receive Delay, Relative to ORA
-40
-30
-25
-20
70 100
145
Noise
Positive Power Supply Rejection,
. Transmit
PPSRx
VFxl + = OV,rms,
Vee = 5.0Voe + 100mVrms
f = OKHz - 50KHz
Negative Power Supply Rejection,
Transmit
VFxl + = OVrms,
NPSRx Vee = - 5.0Voe + 100mVrms
f = OKHz - 50KHz
Positive Power Supply Rejection,
Receive
PCM code equals positive zero
Vee = 5.0Voc + 100mVrms
PPSRR f = OHz - 4000Hz
f = 4KHz - 25KHz
f == 25KHz - 50KHz
Negative Power Supply Rejection,
Receive
PCM code equals positive zero
Vee= -5.0Voc + 100mVrms
NPSRR f = OHz -:- 4000Hz
f = 4KHz - 25KHz
,
f = 25KHz - 50KHz
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
-53 dBmO
40
dBC
40
dBC
40
40
36
dBC
dB
dB
40
40
dBC
dB
dB
36
207
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristic
(Continued)
Symbol
Spurious Out-of-Band Signals
at the Channel Output
Test Condition
Min
Typ
. Loop around measurement, OdBmO,
300Hz - 3400Hz input applied to
VFxl + , Measure individual image
SOS
signals at VFRO
4600Hz - 7600Hz
7600Hz - 8400Hz
8400Hz -100,OOOHz'
Max
Unit
-32
-40
-32
dB
dB
dB
Distortion
Signal to 'Total Distortion
STDx
Sinusoidal test method
Transmit or Receive
Half-Channel
STDR
Level = 3.0dBmO
=OdBmO to 130dBmO
= -40dBmO XMT
RCV
'" - 55dBmO XMT
RCV
Single Frequency Distortion,
Transmit
SFDx
-46
dB
Single Frequency Distortion,
Receive
SFDR
-46
dB
Intermodulation Distortion
IMD
Loop around measurement,
VFx + = -4dBmO to -21dBmO, two
frequencies in the range
300Hz - 3400Hz
-41
dB
Transmit to Receive Crosstalk,
OdBmO Transmit Level
CTX.R
f = 300Hz - 3400Hz
DR = Steady PCM code
-90
-75
dB
Receive to Transmit Crosstalk,
OdBmO Receive Level
CTR-x
f = 300Hz - 3400Hz, VFxl = OV
-90
-70
(Note 1)
dB
33
36
29
30
14
15
dBC
dBC
dBC
dBC
dBC
dBC
Crosstalk
Note 1. CTR.X is measured with a - 4OdBmO activating signal applied at VFxl +
ENCODING FORMAT AT DxOUTPUT
V1N (at GSx) =
c8
+ Full -
Scale
10000000
V1N (at GSx) = OV
11111111
01111111
V1N (at GSx) = - Full - Scale.
00000000
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
208
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
PIN DESCRIPTION
Pin No.
Symbol
Description .
Negative power supply pin. Vee
= -5V
1
Vee
2
GNDA
Analog ground. All signals are referenced to this pin.
3
VFRO
Analog output of the receive filter.
4
Vee
Positive power. supply pin. Vee
5
FSR
Receive frame sync pulse which enables BClKR to shift PCM data
into DR. FSR is an 8KHz pulse train.
6
DR
Receive data input. PCM data is shifted into DR following the FSR
leading edge.
± 5%.
I
The bit clock which shifts data into DR after the FSR leading edge.
Many vary from 64KHz to 2.048MHz. Alternatively, may be a: logic
input which selects either 1.536MHzl1.544MHz or 2.048MHz for
master clock in synchronous mode and BClKx is used for both
·transmit and receive directions.
BClKR/
7
= + 5V
±5%.
CLI~SEl
8
MClKR/
PDN
Receive master clock. Must be 1.536MHz, 1.544MHz or 2.048MHz.
May be asynchronous with MClKx, but should be synchronous with
MClKx for best performance. When MClKRis connected continously
low, MClKR is selected for all internal timing. When MClKR is
connected continuously high the device is powered down.
9
MClKx
Transmit master clock. Must be 1.536MHz, 1.544MHz or 2.048MHz.
Maybe asynchronous with MClKR.
10
BClKx
The bit clock which shifts out the PCM data on Dx. May vary from
64KHz to 2.048MHz, but must be synchronous with MClKx.
11
Dx
The TRI·STATE PCM data output which is enabled by FSx.
12
FSx
Transmit frame sync pulse input which enables BClKx to shift
out the PCM data on Dx. FSx·is an 8KHz pulse train.
13
TSx
Open drain ouptut which pulses low during the encoder time slot.
14
GSx
Analog output of the transmit input amplifier.
Used to externally !iet again.
15
VFxl-
Inverting input of the transmit input amplifier.
16
VFxl+
Non·inverting input of the trans.mitinput amplifier.
,
PIN CONNECTION
VFx'+
VFx'GSx
TSx
KT3054J
DR
FSx
6
BCLKRI
CLKSEL
BCLKx
MCLKRI
PDN
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR'
209
KT3054J
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
POWER·UP
When power is first applied, power-on reset circuitry initializes the COMBO and places it into the power-down mode.
All non-essential circuits are deactivated and the Ox and VFRO outputs are put in high impedance states. To powerup the device, a logical low level or clock must be applied to the MCLKFJPDN pin and FSx and/or FSRpulses must
be 'present. Thus, 2 power-down control modes are available. The first is to pull the MCLKFJPDN pin high; the
alternative is to hold both FSx and FSR inputs continuously low-the device will power-down approximately 2ms
after the last FSx or FSR pulse. Power-up will occur on the first FSx or FSR pulse. The TRI-STATE PCM data
output, Dx, will remain in the high impedance state until the second FSx pulse.
SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
For synchronous operation, the same master clock and bit clock should be used for both the transmit and receive
directions. In this mode, a clock must be applied to MCLKx and the MCLKFJPDN pin can be used as a power-down
control. A low level on MCLKR/PDN powers up the device and a high level powers down the device. In either case,
MCLKx will be selected as the master clock for both the transmit and receive circuits. A bit clock must also be
applied to BCLKx and the BCLKFJCLKSEL can be used to select the proper internal divider for a master clock of
1.536MHz, 1.544MHz or 2.048MHz. For 1.544MHz operation, the device automatically compensates for the 193rd
clock pulse each frame.
With a fixed level on the BcLKFJCLKSEL pin, BCLKx will be selected as the bit clock for both the transmit and
receive directions. In this synchronous mode, the bit clock, BCLKx, may be from 64KHz to 2.048MHz, but must
be synchronous with MCLKx.
Each FSx pulse begins the encoding cycle and the PCM data from the previous encode cycle .is shifted out of
the enabled Dx output on the positive edge of BCLKx. After 8 bit clock periods, the TRI·STATE Dx output is retumed
to a high impedance state. With an FSRpulse, PCM data is latched via the DR Input on the negative edge of BCLKx
(or BCLKR if running). FSx and FSR must be synchronous with MCLKXlR .
TABLE 1. Selection of Master Clock Frequencies
BCLKR/CLKSEL
Master Clock Frequency Selected
Clocked,
1.536MHz or 1.544MHz
0
2.048MHz
1 (or Open Circuit)
1.536MHz or 1.544MHz
ASYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
For asynchronous operation, separate transmit and receive clocks may be applied .. MCLKx and MCLKR must be
1.536MHz, 1.544MHz for the KT3054, and need not be synchronous. For best transmission performance, however,
MCLKR should be synchronous with MCLKx, which is easily achieved by applying only static logic levels to the
MCLKFJPDN pin. This will automatically connect MCLKx to all internal MCLKR functions (see Pin Description). For
1.544MHz operation, the device automatically compensates fo~ the 193rd clock pulse each frame. FSx starts each
encoding cycle and must be synchronous with MCLKx and BCLKx. FSR starts each decoding cycle and must be
synchronous with BCLKR. BCLKRmust be a clock, the logic levels shown in Table 1 are not valid in asynchropous
.
mode. BCLKx and BCLKR may operate from 64KHz to 2.048MHz.
SHORT FRAME SYNC OPERATION
The COMBO can utilize a long frame sync pulse. Upon power initialization, the device assumes a short frame mode.
In this mode, both frame sync pulses, FSx and FSR, must be one bit clock period long, ""ith timing relationships
specified in Figure 2. With FSx high during a falling edge of BCLKx, the next rising edge of BCLKx enables the
Ox TRI-STATE output buffer, which will output the sign bit. The following seven rising edges clock out the
remainirig seven bits, and the next falling edge c;lisables the Dx Ol,ltput. With FSR high during a falling edge of
BCLKR(BCLKx In synch~onous mode), the next falling edge of BCLKR latches in the sign bit. The following seven
falling edges latgch in the seven remaining bits. All four devices may utilize the short frame sync pulse in synchronous
or asynchronous operating mode.
'
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
210
KT3054J
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
LONG FRAME SYNC OPERATION
To use the frame mode, both the frame sync pulses, FSx and FSR, must be three or more bit clock periods
long, with timing relationships specified in Figure 3. Based on the transmit frame sync, FSx, the COMBO will
sense whether short or long frame sync pulses are being used. For 64KHz operation, the frame sync pulse
must be kept low for a minimum of 160ns. The Dx TRI-STATE output buffer is enabled with the rising edge of FSx
or the rising edge of BClKx, whichever comes later, and the first bit clocked out is the sign bit. The following
seven BClKx rising edges clock out the remaining seven bits. The Dx output is disabled by the falling BClKx edge
following the eighth rising edge, or by FSx going low, whichever comes later. A rising edge on the receive frame
sync pulse, FSR, will cause the PCM data at DA to be latched in on the next eight falling edges of BClKR (BClKx
in synchronous mode). All four devices may utilize the long frame sync pulse in synchronous or asynchronous mode.
RECEIVE SECTION
The receive section consists of an expanding DAC which drives a fifth order switched-capacitor low pass filter
clocked at 256KHz. The decoder is A-law or wlaw (KT3054) and the 5th order low pass filter corrects for the sin x/x
attenuation due to the 8KHz sample/hold. The filter is then followed by a 2nd order RC active post-filter/power
amplifier capable of driving a 6000 load to a level of 7.2dBm. The receive section is unity-gain. Upon the
occurrence of FSR; the data at the DR input is clocked in on the falling edge of the next eight BClKA (BClKx)
periods. At the end of the decoder time slot, the decoding cycle begins, and 10l-ls later the decoder DAC output
is updated. The total decoder delay is -10l-ls (decoder update) plus 110l-ls (filter delay) plus 62.51-1s (1/2 frame), which
gives approximately 180l-Is.
TRANSMIT SECTION
The transmit section input is an operational amplifier with provision for gain adjustment using two external
resistors, see Figure 4. The low noise and wide bandwidth allow gains in excess of 20dB across the audio
passband to be realized. The op amp drives a unity-gain filter consisting of RC active pre-filter, followed by an eighth
order switched-capacitor bandpass filter clocked at 256KHz. The output of this filter directly drives the encoder
sample-and-hold circuit. The AID is of companding type according to wlaw (KT3054) or A-law coding conventions. A
precision voltage reference is trimmed in manufacturing to provide an input overload (tMAxl of nominally 2.5V peak
(see table of Transmission Characteristics). The FSx frame sync pulse controls the sampling of the filter output,
and then the successive-approximation encoding cycle begins. The 8-bit code is then loaded into a buffer and shifted
out through Dx at the next FSx pulse. The total encoding delay will be approximately 1651-1s (due to the transmit
filter) plus 1251-1s (due to encoding delay), which totals 290l-Is. Any offset voltage due to the filters or comparator
is cancelled by sign bit integration.
APPLICATION INFORMATION
POWER SUPPLIES
In applications where the printed circuit board may be plugged into a "hot" socket with power and clocks already
present, an extra long ground pin in the connector should be used.
All ground connections to each device should meet at a common point as close as possible to the GNDA pin.
This minimizes the interaction of ground return currents flowing through a common bus impedance. 0.11-1F supply
decoupling capacitors should be connected from this common ground point to Vee and Vee.
For best performance, the ground point of each CODEC/FllTER on a card should be connected to a common card
ground in star formation, rather than via a ground bus.
This common ground point should be decoupled to Vee and Vee with 10l-lF capacitors.
RECEIVE GAIN ADJUSTMENT
For applications where CO DEC/filter receive output must drive a 6000 load, but a peak swing lower than ± 2.5V
is required, the receive gain can be easily adjusted by inl?erting a matched T-pad or r-pad at the output. Table"
lists the required resistor values for 6000 terminations. As these are generally non-standard values, the equations
can be used to compute the attenuation of the closest practical set of resistors. It may be necessary to use
unequal values for the R1 or R4 arms of the. attenuators to achieve a precise attenuation. Generally it is tolerable
to allow a small deviation of the input impedance from nominal while still maintaining a good return loss. For
example a 30dB return loss against 6000 is obtained if the output impedance of the attenuator is in the range 2820
to to 3100 (assuming a perfect transformer).
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
211
I
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
T-Pad Attenuator
'/I"-Pad Attenuator
r-------..,
3001
I
R3
~
l
R4
R4
IZ2
300
1:,.[2,2U600
r-------...,
R1
111
I
I
I
I
Z1!
I
I
1
I
IL.. ___ _
N +1
N
= Z1 (W-1)-~
(N2-1)
N
R2 = z,J Z1'Z2 (w=-:1)
2
R1
.
Where: N
and
I POWER IN
='\1 POWER OUT
s=~
=
Also: Z
.JZsc,-Zoc
.
Where Zsc, = impedance with short circuit termination.
and Zoe = impedance with open circuit termination
TABLE II. Attenuator Table for Z1
c8
SAMSUNG
= Z2 = 3000 (All
Values in 11)
dB
R1
R2
R3
R4
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
.15
16
18
20
1.7
3.5
5.2
6.9
8.5
10.4
12.1
13.8
15.5
17.3
34.4
51.3
68
84
100
115
379
143
156
168
180
190
200
210
218
233
246
26K
.13K
8.7K
6.5K
5.2K
4.4K
3.7K
3.3K
2.9K
2.61
1.3K
850
650
494
402
380
284
244
211
184
161
142
125 .
110
3.5
6.9
10.4
13.8
17.3
21.3
24.2
27.7
31.1
34.6
70
107
144
183
224
269
317
370
427
490
550
635
720
816
924
1.17K
1.5K
52K
26K
17.4K
13K
10.5K
8.7K
7.5K
6.5K
5.8K
5.2K
2.6K
1.8K
1.3K
1.1K
900
785
698
630
527
535
SEMICON~UCrOR
98
77
61
500
473
450
430
413
386
366
212
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3054J
APPLICATION CIRCUITS
-5V
TO SllC
Vee
VFxl+
GNDA
VFxl GSx
Vee
ANALOG
INTERFACE
KT3054J
VFRO
------ FROM TSAC'
FROM SLiC
---------FSx
FSR
______ 1
FROM TSAC
5V OR GNDA
PDN
I
I
DIGITAL
Ox INTERFACE
DR
BClKR/ClKSEl
BClKx
MClKR/PDN
MClKx
Note: XMIT gain = 20 x log(R1
:t2),
(R1
BClKx (2.048MHzl1.544MHz)
+ R2) > 10KO.
Fig. 4
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
213
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3064J
COMBO CODEC
20 CERDIP
The KT3064 Vt-Iaw), is monolithic PCM CODECI
FILTERS utilizing the AID and D/A conversion, a serial
PCM interface. The devices are fabricated using
double-poly CMOS process. The device feature an
additional receive power amplifierto'provide push-pull
balanced output drive capability. The receive gain can
be adjusted by means of two external resistors for an
output level of up to ± 6.6V across a balanced 6000
load. The Analog Loopback switch and TSx output is
also included.
FEATURES
• wlaw compatible
• Meets or exceeds all D3JD4 and CCITT
specifications
• :!: 5V operation
• Low operating power: typically 7,OmW
• Active RC noise filters
• Power-down standby mode: typically 3mW
• Automatic power-down
• Transmit high-pass and low-pass filtering
• Internal precision voltage reference
• Serial I/O interface
• Internal auto-zero circuitry
• TTL or CMOS compatible digital interfa,ce
• Maximizes line interface card circuit density
BLOCK DIAGRAM
R2
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
214
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3064J
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Characteristic
Value
Unit
Vee
7
V
Vee
-7
V
V
Symbol
Vee to GNDA
Vae to GNDA
Voltage at Any Analog Input or Output
Analoge 1/0
Vee+0.3 to VeB -0.3
Voltage. at Any Digital Input or Output
Digital 1/0
Vee+0.3 to GNDA-0.3
V
Ta
-25-+125
·C
Storage Temperature Range
T.
-65-+150
·C
Lead Temperature Soldering, 10 secs)
TL
300
·C
Operating Temperature Range
I
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Unless otherwise noted: Vee=5.0V±5%, Vee= -5V±5%, GNDA=OV, Ta=O·C to 70·C; typical characteristics
specified at Vee = 5.0V, Ta = 25°C; ali signals are referenced to GNDA)
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
. Max
Unit
Power Dissipation
Active Current
led1
Power amplifiers active, VPI = OV
7.0
10.0.
mA
Active Current
lee1
Power amplifiers active, VPI = OV
7.0
10.0
mA
Power'Down Current
leeo
0.5
1.5 .
mA
leBo
0.05
0.3
mA
Power·Down Current
Digital Interface
Input Low Current
hL
GNDAsV1NSV1L, Ali digital inputs
-10
10
p.A
Input High Current
I'H
V'HSV'NSVee
-10
10
p.A
Output Current in High
Impedance State (TRI·STATE)
loz
Ox, GNDASVoSVee
-10
10
p.A
Input Low Voltage
V'L
0.6
V
Input High Voltage
V'H
2.2
Output Low Voltage
VOL
Dx,IL=3.2mA
SIG R, IL = 1.0mA
Tsx, IL=3.2mA, Open Drain
Output High Voltage
VOH
Ox, IH = - 3.2mA
SIG R, IH = - 1.0mA
V
0.4
0.4
0.4
2.4
·2.4
V
V
Analog Interface with Transmit Input Amplifier
Input Leakage Current
I,XA
- 2.5V sV S + 2.5V, VFxl + or VFxl-
Input Resistance
R,XA
- 2.5V sV S + 2.5V, VFxl
Output Resistance
RoXA
Closed loop, unity gain
Load Resistance
RLXA
GSx
Load Capacitance
CLXA
GSx
Output Dynamic Range
VoXA
GSx, RL~ 10KO
ciS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
+ or VFxl-
-200
200
10
1
3
10
MO
KO
50
±2.B
nA
MO
pF
V
215
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3064J
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
, Characteristic
Voltage Gain
(Continued)
Test Conditions
Symbol
Av'XA
Unit-Gain Bandwidth
FuXA
Offset Voltage
ViJsXA
Common-Mode Voltage
VeMXA
Min
Typ
Max
5000
VFxl + to GSx
1
CMRRXA>60dB
Unit
VIV
2
MHz
-20
20
-2.5
2.5
mV
V
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio CMRRXA DC Test
60
dB
Power Supply Rejection Ratio
60
dB
PSRRXA DC Test
Analog Interface with Receive Filter (All Devices)
Output Resistance
Output DC Offset Voltage
RoRF
VOSRO
1
Pin VFRO
Measure from VFRO to GNDA
load Resistance
RLRF
VFRO= ±2.5V
load Capacitance
CLAF
Connect from VFRO'to GND A
-200
3
0
200
mV
10
KO
25
pF
Analog Interface with Power Amplifiers (All Devices)
Input Leakage Current
IPI
-1.0V:s;VPI:s;1.0V:s;VPI:s;1.0V
Input Resistance
RIPI
-1.0V :s;VPI:s; 1.0V
Input Offset Voltage
Vias
,
Output Resistance
Unit-Gain Bandwidth
ROP
Fe
CLP
nA
MO
-25
25
1
KHz
100
500
1000
VPO+ or
VPO- to
GNDA
mV
0
400
Open loop (VPO - )
RL = 6000
Rl = 3000
100
10
Inverting unity gain at
VPO+ or VPORL~15000
load Capacitance
-100
pF
pF
pF
Gain from VPO - to VPO +
GA p +
RL::: 3000 VPO + to GNDA level at
VPO-::: -1.77Vrms (+3dBmo)
Power Supply Rejection of
Vee or VBB
PSRR p
VPO - connected to. VPI
OKHz-4KHz
OKHz-50KHz
Frequency of Master Clock
IltpM
Depends on the device used and
the BClKR/ClKSEl Pin
MClKx and MClKA
Width of Master Clock High
tWMH
MClKx and MClKR
160
Width of Master Clock low
tWML
MClKx and MClKR
160
Rise Time of Master Cl:ock
tRM
MClKx and MClKR
50
ns
Fall Time of Master Clock
tFM
MClKx and MClKR
50
ns
Set-Up Time from BCLKx High
(and FSx in long Frame Sync'
Mode) to MClKx Falling Edge
Period of Bit Clock
tSBFM
First bit clock after the leading
edge of FSx
tps
VIV
-1
60
dB
dB
36
1.536
1.544
'2.048
.
ns
ns
ns
100
485
MHz
MHz
MHz
488
15,725
ns
Width of Bit Clock High
tWBH
V'H= 2.2V
160
ns
Width of Bit Clock low
tWBl
Vll:::0.6V
160
ns
Rise Time of Bit Clock
tRB
tPB= 460ns
50
ns
Fall Time of Bit Clock
tF8
tPB= 488ns
50
ns
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
216
KT3064J
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristic
(Continued)
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Holding Time from Bit Clock
Low to Frame Sync
tHBF
Long frame only
0
ns
Holding Time from Bit Clock
High to Frame Sync
tHOLO
Short frame only
0
ns
Set-Up Time for Frame Sync
to Bit Clock Low
tSFB
Long Frame Only
80
ris
Delay Time. from BCLKx High
to Data Valid
tOBo
Load = 150pF plus 2 LSTIL loads
0
Delay Time to TSx Low
txop
Load = 150pF plus 2 LSTIL loads
Delay Time from BCLKx Low
to Data Output Disabled
tOEe
Delay Time to Valid Data from
FSx or BCLKx,
whichever Comes Later
tOZF
Set-Up Time from DR Valid to
BCLKRIX Low
tSOB
50
ns
Hold Time from BCLKR/x Low
to DR Invalid
IHBO
50
ns
Delay Time from BCLKRIX Low
to SIGR Valid
tOFSSF
Set-Up Time from FSX1R to
BCLKXlR Low
CL=OpF to 150pF
180
ns
140
ns
50
165
ns
. 20
165
ns
Load = 50pF plus 2 LSTIL loads
300
ns
tSF
Short frame sync pulse
(1 or 2 bit clock periods 10ng)(Note 1)
50
ns
Hold Time from BCLKx1R Low
. to FSXlR Low
tHF
Short frame sym; pulse
(1 or 2 bit clock periods 10ng)(Note 1)
100
ns
Hold Time from 3rd Period of
Bit Clock low to Frame Sync
(FSx of FSR)
tHBFI
Long frame sync pulse
(from 3.to 8 bit clock periods long)
100
ns
Minimum Width of the Frame .
Sync Pulse (Low Level)
tWFL
64K bitls operating mode
160
ns
Note 1: For short frame sync timing, FSx and FSR must go high while their respective bit Clocks are high.
PIN CONFIGURATION
.
.,
>
+
0
Il.
>
c8
+
I
J'
>
J'
>
«
0
Z
(!)
I
0
Il.
>
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
::
'..J
:::;;
u
0:
>
0
a:
IL
>
u
<)
>
a:
(/)
IL
a:
0
~
..J
In
Ii:
"
U
z
0
..J
Il.
In
"U:::;;
u
Ii:
..J
217
II
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3064J
TIMING DIAGRAM
MClKx
MClKA
BlCKx
FSx
loze
Ox
BClKA
Fig. 2. Short Frame Sync Timing
MClKX
MClKA
BClKx
FSX
Ox
BClKA
FSR
----J["
Fig. 3 Long Frame Sync Timing
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
218
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3064J
PIN DESCRIPTION
Pin
c8
Name
Function
1
VPO+
2
GNOA
Analog ground. All signals are referenced to this pin.
3
vpo-
The inverted output of the receive power amplifier.
4
VPI
5
VFAO
6
Vee'
Positive power supply pin Vee
7
FSA
Receive frame sync pulse which enables BClKA to shift PCM data into
OA, FS A is an BKHz pulse train. (refer to Fig 2 and 3 for timing details)
B
OA
Receive data input. PCM data is shifted into OA following the FSA
leading edge.
9
BClKFJ
ClKSEl
10
MClKAI
PON
Receive master clock. Must be 1.536MHz or 2.04BMHz. May be
asynchronous with MClKx, but should be synchronous with MClKx
for best performance. When MClKA is connected continuously low,
MClKx is selected for ,all internal timing. When MClKA is connected
continuously high, the device is powered down.
11
MClKx
Transmit master clock. Must be 1.536MHz, 1.544MHz or 2.04BMHz.
May be asyncl"jronous with MClKA,
12
BClKx
The bit clock which shifts out the PCM data on Ox. May vary from
64KHz to 2.04BMHz, but must be synchronous with MClKx.
13
Ox
The TRI-STATE PCM data output which is enabled by FSx.
14
FSx
Transmit frame sync pulse input which enables BClKx to shift out the
PCM data a on Ox, FSx is an BKHz pulse train. (refer to Fig 2, 3)
1,5
TSx
The non-inverted output of the receive power amplifier.
Inverting input to the receive power amplifier.
Also powers down both amplifiers when connected to Vee.
Analog output of 'the receive filter.
II
= +5V±5%.
The bit clo.ck which shifts data into OA after the FSA leading edge.
,May vary from 64KHz to 2.04BMHz. Alternatively, may be a logic input
which selects either 1.536MHzl1.544MHz or 2.04BMHz for master clock
in synchronous mode and BClKx is used for both transmit and receive
directions. (see Table 1)
Open drain output which pulses low during
t~e
encoder time slot.
'Analog loopback control inpu!. Must be set to logic '0' for normal
operation. When pulled to logic '1', the transmit filter input is dis
connected from the output of the preamplifier and connected to the
VPO+ output of the receive power, amplifier.
16
ANlB
17
GSx
Analog output of the transmit input amplifier.
Used to externally set again.
1B
VFxl-
Inverting input of the transmit input amplifier.
19
YFxl+
Non-inverting input of the transmit input amplifier.
20
Vee
Negative power supply pin Vee::: - 5V ± 5%.
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
219
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT3064J
.FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
POWER·UP
When. power is first applied, power-on reset circuitry initializes the COMBO and places it into the power-down mode.
All non-essential circuits are deactivated and the Ox, VFRO, VPO - and VPO + outputs are put in high impedance
states. To power-up the device, a logical low level or clock must be applied to the MCli
Il!
co
+0.5
CO
I
:!!
4~
40 ..:;....
40
30
20 r-
~
39~5116
~
Iz
:c
~4
:k
g
z~
Ii
~ANNEL
f-
~"23
22~5-
"
JANK
SPECIFICATIONS _ _
+30
-10
-30 -40 -50
INPUT LEVEL - dBmO
-0.1
-0.1
0..1 _
~~5
-0.05
-,
-1
-0.5.1
03
-2 _~HANNEL BANK
I
-3
-20
r
-0.1
SPECIFICATIONS
I I
10
+1
-4
+10
-60
I
-w
-3
-20
-30
-40
-50
I
-80
-70
INPUT LEVEL - dBmO
Fig. 5
FIg. •
AID, D/A CONVERSION TIMING
f--------------~125~oec---------------i
SAMPLE AND HOLD
SAMPLE TIME
::: 32 MASTER CLOCKS·
ENABLE SAR
SAR REQUIRES
::: 128 MASTER CLOCKS
_____--J/
________________
~
RCV SYNC
\~<------------------------J;lANALOGOUTPUTUPDATED
__________
Fig. 6
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TIMING
1-_2OO_n_O_-I REQUIRED FOR DATA TO TRANSFER
KT5116
FROM MASTER TO SLAVE
XMIT
INTERNAL
CLOCK
DIGITAL
OUT
XMIT SYNC
)(VALID DATA
XMIT CLOCK
------------------'
RCV
INTERNAL
CLOCK
REQUIRED TO TRANSFER DATA
FROM MASTER TO SLAVE
200n
DIGITAL
IN
RCV SYNC
SOns REQUIRED TO LOAD MASTER
RCV CLOCK
VALID INCOMING DATA
. Fig. 7
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
234
KT5116J
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT5116 AID CONVERTER (p.·Law Encoder) TRANSFER CHARACTERISTIC
11111111
-"".....
11110000
11100000
/
1101 0000
..-
l/
I
11000000
10110000
~
5
10100000
oooo}
10010000
II
1000
--' 0000 0000
0--
~
00010000
13
00100000
Ci
0011 0000
0100 0000
j
01010000
,
01100000
01110000
01111111
-
~
V-
./
~
- VREF
0
2
+ VREF
-2-
+VREF
Fig. 8 ANALOG INPUT (VOLTS)
-
D/A CONVERTER (p.·Law Decoder) TRANSFER CHARACTERISTIC
01111111
.........
0111 0000
.......
01100000
~
,
\.
01010000
0100 0000
0011 0000
00100000
00010000
10010000
10100000
1011 0000
,
1100 0000
\
1101 0000
11100000
r"
11110000
~ i"--
11111111
-VREF
- VREF
-2-
0
+ VREF
2
+VREF
Fig. 9 ANALOG OUTPUT (VOLTS)
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
235
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT5116J
64KHz OPERATION, TRANSMITTER SECTION TIMING
1---------------125~.~c
----:-----------1
XMITSYNC
1 MASTER
CLOCK
PERIOD
(MIN)
Fig. 10 PCM DATA PRESENT
Note: All rise and fail iimes are measured from O.4V and 2.4V. All delay times are measured from 1.4V.
64KHz OPERATION, RECEIVER SECTION TIMING
125~.ec------------~--1
.
-1
17 MASTER
.
CLOCK'
PERIODS
(MIN)
tRDS
~ALI fiR,,f;J/ilFlIQ!ifilil.Q/'ifll'.QfiIi!0r,:JlFfl\CJrlli!iJ,QfilW.CJrl
.fi::1:1t:j~ff11:i E7v:t1i~v:t:IJ EJVJ.'t:J ~tJ':ff:J ~tN:Je3~ ~\f11:J~ \
Fig. 11
Note: All. rise and fall times are measured from O.4V and 2.4V. All delay times are measured from 1.4V.
PCM SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
KT5116
GAIN ADJUST'
8
BAND
PASS
FILTER'
TRANSMITIER .
(AID)
DIGITAL
MUX
. DIGITAL
TRUNK
FROM
{
OTHER
CHANNELS.
2 WIRE CABLE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
---~----
13
LOW
PASS
FILTER
I
I
LL~~~~~~~~ __ _
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
RECEIVER
(DIA)
12
DIGITAL
DEMUX
DIGITAL
TRUNK
TO
{
OTHER
CHANNELS
236 .
KT5116J
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS TEST CONFIGURATION
r-----------,
I
I
I
I
I
IDEAL DECODER
I
I
1.004KHz
SIGNAL
SOURCE
I
I----ilf---{
I
I
I
I
J
I
I
SYSTEM
I
I
I
II
IL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .,
I
J
I
I
I
ENCODER ONLY
J
NOUT
HP3551A
1.004KHz
NOTCH
I
FILTER
FILTER
I
.
L ______________
~
_______ I
~
SOUT+NoUT
Fig. 12
Note: The ideal decoder consists of a digital decomponder and a 13·bit precision DAC.
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
The equipment connections shOwn in Figure 12 can be used to evaluate tlie performance of the KT5116.
An analog signal provided by the HP3551 a transmission test set is connected to the Analog Input (Pin 1) of the
KT5116. The Digital Output of the CODeC is tied back to the Digital Input and the Analog Output is fed through
a lOW-pass filter to the HP3551A.
Remaining pins of the KT5116 are connected as follows:
1. RCV SYNC is tied to XMIT SYNC.
2. XMIT CLOCK is tied to Master CLOCK. The signal is inverted and tied to RCV clock.
The following timing signals are required:
1. Master CLOCK=2.048MHz
2. XMIT SYNC repetition rate=8KHz
3. XMIT SYNC width=8 XMIT CLOCK periods.
when all the above requirements are met, the set-up of Figure 12 permits the measurement of synchronous system
performance over a wide range of Analog Inputs.
The data register and ideal decoder provide a means of checking the encoder portion of the KT5116 independently
of .the decoder section. To test the system in the asynchronous mode, Master CLOCK should be separated from
RCV CLOCK. XMIT CLOCK and RCV CLOCK are separated also separated.
c8
SAMSUNG S.EMICONDUCTOR
237
CMOS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KT5116J
ANALOG INPUT
DEMO SET CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
ANALOG OUTPUT
POWER
AMP
R3
2.048MHz
r----IO~~
R6
10MD
'NON
·POLARIZED
2.048MHz
128KHz
5V
2KII±1'10
• Power Supply Ripple Rejection
C7
+5V
C6
C5
C4
0---1I--I--I~-Ic.-lI-.05-~-F-x-4-l'" .05~F
C3
GNDDo--~-~-~--4
GNDAo---------4----~--,
C2
.05~F
-5Vo--------~-----
NOTE: All unused input connected to GNDD or Vee, only in HeT series.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
238
LM567C
LINEAR INTEGRATED aRCUIT
TONE DECODER
8 DIP
The LM567C is a monolithic phase locked loop system designed to pr0vide a saturated transistor switch to GND. when an input signal is present
within the passband. External components are used to independently
set center frequency bandwidth and output delay.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wide frequency range (O.01Hz - 500kHz).
Bandwidth adJustabl, from 0 to 14%
logic compatible output wHh 100mA current sinking capability.
Inherant Immunity to fal.. 81gna18.
High rejection of out..of.band slgnal8 and nolae.
Frequency range adjustable over 20:1 range by an external
re8lstor.
8 SOP
II
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Touch Tone Decoder
Wireless Intercom.
Communications paging deco,ders
Frequency monitoring and control.
Ultrasonic controls (remote TV etc.)
Carrier current remote controls.
Precision oscillator.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Device
Package
LM567CN
8 DIP
LM567CD
8 SOP
Operating Temperature
0- +70·C
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCI'OR
239
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
LM567C
=
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta 25°C)
Characteristic
Operating Voltage
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
IPower Dissipatlon
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Symbol
value
Unit
10
-10 -Vee +0.5
15
300
0-+70
-65-+150
V
V
V
mW
'J
Vcc
V1N
Vo
Pd
Topr
Tstg
"C
°C
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Nee =5JJV. T... 25°C unless other wise specified)
Characteristic
Symbol
Operating Voltage Range
Supply Current Quiescent
Supply Current Activated
Quiescent Power Dissipation
Vcc
Icc-1
Icc-2
Highest Center Frequency
Center Frequency Stability
Center Frequency Shift
With Supply Voltage
HFO
Fse
Fcs
Largest Detection Bandwidth
Largest Detection B.W Skew
Largest Detection Bandwidth
Variation With Supply Voltage
Largest Detection Bandwidth
Variation With Temperature
B.W
Typ
Max
Unit
.4.75
5.0
7
12
35
9.0
10
15
V
. mA
mA
mW
100
500
35±60
0.7
2
KHz
ppmfOC
%N
14
2
±1
18
3
±5
%offo
OAl of fo
oAlN
RL=20K
RL=20K
OOC to 700C
10
B.Ws
. B.Wv
4.75-6.75V
B.Wt
Input Resistance
RIN
V1N-1
Fastest On-Off Cycling Rate
Output Leakage Current
Min
POD
Smallest Detectable
Input Voltage
Largest No Output
Input Voltage
Greatest Simultaneous
Outband Signal To Inband
Signal Ratio
Minimum InPllt Signal to
Wideband Noise Ratio .
Test Conditions
20
IL =100mA. fi=fo
V1N-2
S1/Sd
S2/Sd
.. FoUT
leo
20
10
RL=20k
V IN =300mVRMS
fi=fo=100KHz
fi 1 =140KHz
fi 2 =60KHz
RL=20K
V1N =25mVRMS
mVrms
mVrms
+6
dB
-6
dB
f0/20
0.01
Output Saturaton Voltage
IL =30mA. V1N =25mVrms
It =100mA. V1N =25mVrms
0.2
0.6
Output Fall Time
Output Rise Time
TF
TR
RL=50
RL=50
30
150
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Kohm
25
15
VSIQ'"1
VSIQ'"2
c8
%fOC
±0..1
25
pA
0.4
V
V
1.0
nS
nS
240
LM567C
LINEAR .INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
BLOCK DIAGRAM
The LM567C monolithic tone decoder consists of a phase detector, low
pass filter, and current controlled oscillator which comprise the basic
Output 1
Filter
phase-locked loop, plus an additional low pass filter and quadrature
detector enabling detection on in-band signals. The device has a
low Pass
normally high open collector output capable of sinking 100 mAo
Loop Fitte, 2
The input signal is applied to Pin 3 (20 kO nominal input reSistance). Free
running frequency is controlled by an RC network at Pins 5 and 6 and
can typically reach 500 kHz. A capacitor on Pin 1 serves as the output
filter and eliminates out-of-band triggering. PLL filtering is accomplished
with 'a capacitor on Pin 2; bandwidth and skew are also dependant upon
the circuitry here. Bandwidth is adjustable from 0% to 14% of the center
frequency. Pin 41s +Vcc (4.75 to 9V nominal, 10V maximum); Pin 7 is
ground; and Pin 8 is open collector output, pulling loW when an in-band
signal triggers the device.
I
Fig. 1
DEFINITION OF LM567C PARAMETERS
CENTER FREQUENCY fo
fo is the free-running frequency of the C L controlled oscillator with no input signal. It is determined by resistor R, between
pins 5 and 6, and capacitor C, from pin 6 to ground fo can be approximated by
fo=_1_
R,C,
where R, is in ohms and C, is in farads.
LARGEST DETECTION BANDWIDTH
The largest detection bandwidth is the largest frequency range within Which an input signal above the threshold voltage will cause a logical zero state at the output. The maximum detection bandwidth corresponds to the lock range of the PLL.
DETECTION BANDWIDTH (BW)
The detection bandwidth is the frequency range centered about fo, within which an input signal larger than the threshold
voltag/il (typically 20mVrms) will cause a logic zero state at the output. The detection bandwidth corresponds to the 'capture
range of the PLL and is determined by the low-pass bandwidth filter. The bandwidth of the filter, as a percent of fo, can
be determined by the approximation
where V; is the input signal in volts, rms, and C~ is the capaCitance at pin 2 in I'F.
DETECTION BAND SKEW
The detection band skew is a measure of how accurately the largest detection band is centered about the center frequency,
fo. It is defined as (fmax +fm;n -2fo)lIo, where fmax and Im;n are the frequencies corresponding to the edges of the detection
band. If necessary, the detection band skew can be reduced to zero by an optional centering adjustment.
c8SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
241
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
LMS67C
PIN DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT FILTER -
C3 (Pin 1)
Capacitor C3 connected from pin 1 to ground forms a simple low-pass post detection filter to eliminate spurious outputs
due to out-of-band signals. The time constant of the filter can be expressed as T3 =R3C3, where R3 (4.7kG) is the internal
impedance at pin 1.
The precise value of G3 is not entical for most applications. To eliminate the possibility of false triggering by spurious
signals, it is recommended that C3 be 2: 2 C2, where C2 is the loop filter capacitance at pin 2.
If the value of C3 becomes too large, the turn-on qr turn-off time of the output stage will be delayed until the voltage
change across C3 reaches the threshold voltage. In certain applications, the delay may be desirable as a means of
suppressing spurious outputs. Conversely, if the value of C3 is too small, the beat rate at the output of the quadrature detec.
tor may cause a false logic level change at the output. (Pin 8)
The average voltage (during lock) at pin 1 is a function of the inband input amplitude in accordance with the given transfer
characteristic.
LOOP FILTER -
C2 (Pin 2)
Capacitor C2 connected from pin 2 to ground serves as a single pole, low-pass filter for the PLL portion of the LM567C
.
The filter time constant is given by T2 =R2C2, where R2 (10 kG) is the impedance at pin 2.
The selection of C2 is determined by the detection bandwidth requirements. For additional information see section on
"Definition of LM567C Parameters".
The voltage at pin 2, the phase detector output, is a linear function of frequency over the range of 0.95 to 1.05 fa, with
a slope of approximately 20 mVl% frequency deviation.
INPUT (Pin 3)
The input signal is applied to pin 3 through a coupling capacitor. This terminal is internally biased at a dc level 2 volts
above ground, and has an input impedance level of approximately 20 kG
TIMING RESISTOR Rl AND CAPACITOR C1 (Pins 5 and 6)
. The center frequency of the decoder is set by resistor R, between pins 5 and 6, and capacitor C, from 'pin 6 to ground,
as shown in Figure 3.
.pin 5 is the oscillator squarewave output which has a magnitude of approximately Vee - 1.4V and an average dc level
of Vee/2. A 1 kG load may be driven from this point. The voltage at pin 6 is an exponential triangle waveform with a peakto-peak amplitude of 1 volt and an average dc level of Vecl2. Only high impedance loads should be connected to pin 6
avoid disturbi.ng the temperature stability or duty cycle of the oscillator.
.
LOGIC OUTPUT (Pin 8)
Terminal 8 provides a binary logic output when an input signal is present within the pass-band of the decodef. The logic
output is an uncommitted, "base-collector" power transistor capable of switching high CJrrent loads. The current level at
the output is determined by an external load resistor, RL , connected from pin 8 to the positive supply.
When an in'band signal is present, the output transistor at pin 8 saturates with a collector voltage less than 1 volt (typically
0.6V) at full rated current of 100 mAo If large output voltage swings are needed, Rl can be connected to a supply voltage,
V+, higher than the Vee supply. For safe operation, V+ :s; 20 volts.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
242
LM567C
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SELECTION OF EXTERNAL COMPONENTS
A typical connection diagram for the LM567C is shown in Figure 3. For most applications, the following procedure will
be sufficient for determination of the external components At, Ct, C2 , and C3 •
1. At and Ct should be selected for the desired center frequency by the expression fa =l/AtCt. For optimum temperature
stability, At should be selected such that 2kO, and the AtC t product should have sufficient stability over the projected
operating temperature range.
2. Low-pass capacitor, C 2 , can be determined from the Bandwidth versus Input Signal Amplitude graph of Figure 7.
One approach is to select an area of operation from the graph, and then adjust the input level and value of C2 accordingly. Or, if the input amplitude variation is known, the required foC2 product can be found to give the desired bandwidth.
Constant bandwidth operation requires V,>200mV rms. Then, as noted on the graph, bandwidth will be controlled
solely by the foC2 product.
3. Capacitor C 3 sets the band edge of the low-pass filter which attenuates frequencies outside of the detection band and
thereby eliminales spurious outputs. If C3 is too small, frequencies adjacent to the detection band may switch the output
stage off and on at the beat frequency, or the output may pulse off and on during the turn-on transient. a typical
.
minimum value of C 3 is 2 C2 •
Conversely, if C3 is too large, turn-on and turn-off of the output stage will be delayed until the voltage across C3 passes
the threshold value.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The LM567C is a frequency selective tone decoder system based on the phase-locked loop (PLL) principle. the system
is comprised of a phase-locked loop, a quadrature AM detector, a voltage comparator, and an output logic driver. The four
sections are internally interconnected as shown in Figure 1.
When an· input tone is present within the pass-band of the circuit, the PLL synchronizes or "locks" on the input signal.
The quadrature detector serves as a lock indicator: when the PLL is locked on an input signal, the dc v'oltage at the output of
the detector is shifted. This dc level shift is then converted to an output logic pulse by the amplifier and logic driver. The
logic driver is a "bare collector" transistor stage capable of switching 100 mA loads.
The logic output at pin 8 is normally in a "high" state, until a tone that is within the capture range of the decoder is present
at the input. When the decoder is locked on an input signal, the logic output at pin 8 goes to a "low" state.
The center frequency of the detector is set by the free-running frequency of the current-controlled oscillator in the PLL.
This free-running frequency, fa, is determined by the selection of At and C t connected to pins 5 and 6, as shown in
Figure 3. The detection bandwidth is determined by the size of the PLL filter capacitor, C2; and the output response speed
is controlled by the output filter capacitor, C3
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
243
II
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
LM567C
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Fig. 2)
TYP. BW YS T~PERATURE
CENTER FREQ. YS TEMPERATURE
14
-
12
8
.....
6_
.....;
4_
r--..
2
-is
0
7&
25
-
100
TEIIPEIW'UIII rei
BW YS CENTER FREQUENCY
.........
o
10
12
14
100
18
aw~allO)
11(
--lIII0
101(
CURRENT DRAIN VB.
BW (Ca. C3 CHARCt)
~
~~
~ t':
""
1001<
111
w::c
I
JI
f'\ t\ea
~ ["-....
f'\ 1'-1"--l"'- t-
2"
c8
4
10
12
14
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
18
244
LMS67C'
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
OUTPUT SATURATION VOLTAGE
VB AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
OPERATING CYCLE VB BANDWIDTH
1000
500
"-
"\A
"\
50
"
v~.5v,L~
-t-
1.0
~-
1 _ -- - ' -
D.8
II: Bandwidth IImII8d bV c.- B: BandWidth Ilmllod bV
external resistor
(MInimum Ca)
~ r--
f\.
~r'\ ~
" t\..
"-
20
10
I'\.
0,2
"'
10
50
20
---,...
, -25
100
L_100mA
V
IL_30mA
25
/
50
---
75
II
/"
100
BANDWIDTH ("C)
BANDWIDTH (1Ma 01 10)
AC TEST CIRCUIT
+5V
LM567C
Yin
+5V
fi=100KHz
Note: Adjust for fo=1OOKHz
Fig. 2
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
245
(d) Frequency Doubler
AL
8
6
3
5
lSL
AL
./
c8
Al =6.8K to 15K
R2-4.7K
A3=20K
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
'C2~
10
~Cl
246
LM567L
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MICROPOWER TONE DECODER
8 DIP
The LM567L is a micropower phase-locked loop (PLL) circuit designed
for general purpose tone and frequency decoding. In applications requiring very low power dissipation, the LM567L can replace the popular 567 type decoder with only minor component valu~ changes. The
LM567L offers approximately 1I1Oth the power dissipation of the conventional567 type tone decoder, without sacrificing its key features such as
the oscillator stability, frequency selectivity, and detection threshold.
Typical quiescent power dissipation is less than 4mW at 5 volts.
8 SOP
I
FEATURES
• Very low power dissipation (4mW at 5V)
..
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bandwidth adjustable from 0 to 14% of fo
Logic compatible output with 10mA current sinking capability.
Highly stable center frequency_
Center frequency adjustable from 0.01 Hz to 60KHz.
Inherent immunity to false signals.
High rejection of out-of-band signals and noise.
Frequency range adjustable over 20:1 range by external resistor.
APPLICATIONS
• BaHery-oPllrated tone detection • Touch-tone decoding
• Sequential tone decoding
• Communications paging
• Ultrasonic remote-control
• Telemetric decoding
ORDERING INFORMATION
Device
Package
LM567LN
8 DIP
LM567LD
8 SOP
Operating Temperature
0-+ 70·C
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
·c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
247
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
LMS67L
=
, ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta 25°C)
Characteristic
' value
Symbol
Power Supply
Power Dissipation
Plastic Package
Derate Above +25°C
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Unit
Vee
10
V
Pd
300
2.5
0- +70
-65 - +150
mW
mWfOC
°C
°C
Topr'
Tstg
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Vee = +5V, T. = 25°C, unless otherwise specilied.)
Characteristic
Symbol
Supply Voltage Range
Vee
Supply Current/Quiescent
Icc>,
Supply Current/Activated
leC>2
Highest Center Frequency
Hlo
Te,st Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
8.0
V
0.6
1.0
0.8
1.4
mA
mA
4.75
RL=20KO,
' RL =20KO, V'N =300mV, I, =10
R1=3KO- 5KO
10
60
KHz
-150
ppml°C
Center Frequency Drift
Temperature
0200mVrms. Then, as noted on the graph, bandwidth will be
.
controlled solely by the fa C2 product.
3. Capacitor C3 sets the band edge of the low-pass filter which attenuates frequencies outside of the detection band
and thereby eliminates spurious outputs. If C3 is too small, frequencies adjacent to the detection band may switch
the output stage off and on at the beat frequency, or the output may pulse off and on during the turn-on transient.
A typical minimum value for C3 is 2 C2.
Conversely, if C3 is too large, turn-on and turn-off of the output stage will be delayed until the voltage across C3
passes the threshold value.
PRECAUTIONS
1. The LM567L will lock on signals near (2n+l) fa and produce an output for signals near (4n+ 1) fa, for n=O, I, 2 etc.
Signals at 5 fa and 9 fa can cause an unwanted output and should, therefore, be attenuated before reaching the input
of the circuit.
.
2. Operating the LM567L in a reduced bandwidth mode of operation at input levels less than.200mVrms results in
maximum immunity to noise and out-band signals. Decreased loop damping, however, causes the worst-case lock-up .
time to increase, as shown by the graph of Fig 13.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR'
252
LM567L
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
3.
Bandwidth variations due to changes in the in-band signal amplitude can be eliminated by operating the LM567L
in the high input level mode, above 200mV. The input stage is then limiting, however, so that out-band signals or high
noise levels can cause an apparent bandwidth reduction as the in-band signal is suppressed. In addition, the limited
input stage will create in-band components from subharmonic signals so that the circuit becomes sensitive to signals at fo/3, f0l5 etc.
4. Care should be exerc'ised in lead routing and lead lengths should be kept as short as possible. Power supply leads
should be properly bypassed close to the integrated circuit and grounding paths should be carefully determined to
avoid ground loops and undesirable voltage variations. In addition, circuits requiring heavy load currents should be
provided by a separate power supply, or filter capacitors increased to minimize supply voltage variations.
OPTIONAL CONTROLS
PROGRAMMING
Varying the value of resistor R1 and/or capaCitor C1 will change the center frequency. The value of R1 can be changed
either mechanically or by solid state switches. Additional C1 capacitors can be added by grounding them through saturated
npn transistors.
SPEED OF RESPONSE
The minimum lock-up time is inversely related to the loop frequency. As the natural loop frequency is lowered, the turn-on
transients becomes greater. Thus maximum operating speed is obtained when the value of capaCitor C2 is minimum. At
the instant an input Signal is applied, its phase may drive the oscillator away from the incoming frequency rather than toward
it. Under this condition, the lock-up transient is in a worst case situation, and the minimum theoretical lock-up time will not
be achievable.
The follOWing expressions yield the values of C2 and C3, in microfarads, which allow the maximum operating speeds
for various center frequencies where fa is Hz.
13
C2= - ,
fa
26
C3=
fa
Jl.F
The minimum rate that digital information may be detected without losing information due to turn-on transient or output
. chatter is about 10 cycles/bit, which corresponds to an information transfer rate of f0/10 baud. In situations where minimum
turn-off is of less importance than fast turn-on, the optional sensitivity adjustment circuit of Fig 5 can be used to bring
the quiescent C3 voltage closer to the threshold Voltage. Sensitivity to beat frequenCies, noise, and extraneous signals,
however, will be increased.
+V
+V
a1I
LM567L
1
R
DECREASE
SNESITIVITY
RA
LM567L
LM567L
1-'-'-1'-~~-~:
5DK
C3
DECREASE
SENSITIVITY
, .
INCREASE
SENSITIVITY
INCREASE
SENSITIVITY
SILICON
DIODES FOR
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
(OPTIONAL)
Fig. 5. Adjustable Sensitivity Connections
ciS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUcroR
253
I
LM567L
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
CHATTER
When the value of C3 is small, the lock· transient and ac components at the lock detector output may cause the output
stage to move through its threshold more than once, resulting in output chatter.
Although some loads, such as lamps and relays will not respond to chatter, logic may interpret chatter as a series of output
signals. Chatter can be eliminated by feeding a portion of the output back to the input (Pin 1) or, by increasing the size of
capacitor C3. Generally, the feedback method is preferred since keeping C3 small will enable faster operation. Three
. alternate schemes for chatter prevention are shown in Fig 6. Generally, it is only necessary to assure that the feedback time
constant does not get so large that it prevents operation at the highest anticipated speed.
+v
+V
RL
LM567L
+v
i~~·'"
RL
LM567L
C1
8
~C3
RI'
100K
1
~C3
+V
R
10~K
RL
LM567L r8--t~-'
Fig. 6. Methods of Reducing Chatter
SKEW ADJUSTMENT
The circuits shown in Fig 7 can be used to change the position of the detection band (capture range) within the largest
detection band (lock range). By moving the detection band to either edge of the lock range, input signal variations will expand
the detection band in one direction only, since R3 also has a slight effect on the duty cycle, this approach may be useful to
obtain a precise duty cycle when the circuit is used as an oscillator.
IL~_I'
+V
+V
L
--. 1
LOWERSfo
R2
R1
LM567L
LM567L
51(
50K
lC2
RAISES 10
A3
1.0K
RAISESfo
SILICON
DIODES FOR
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
(OPTIONAL)
<
Fig. 7. Detection Band Skew Adjustment
.c8
SAMSUNG
SEMICONDU~R
254
LM567L
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
FIG 8. SUPPLY CURRENT
V. SUPPLY VOLTAGE
FIG 9. LARGEST DETECTION BANDWIDTH
V. OPERATING FREQUENCY
3. 0
15
1'\
"'-
2.5
NO LOAD "ON"
~
I 2. 0
i!§'
u
~
V
1. 5
,//"
~
II:
i
CURREN~
°vV
1.
/V
II
~SCENT CURRENT
o.
5 --
o
•
10
100Hz
10Hz
SUPPLY VOLTAGE - VOLTS
1KHz
10KHz
100KHz
CENTER FREQUENCY
FIG 10. DETECTION BANDWIDTH
V. A FUNCTION OF C2 AND C3
FIG 11. BANDWIDTH Vs INPUT SIGNAL
AMPLITUDE (C2 IN ~F)
2W~--~~~~---+---+---r---r--~
C3
C2
16
10
BANDWIDTH - % OF to
FIG 12. BANDWIDTH VARIATION
WITH TEMPERATURE
1.
400
12.5
12
200
10
100
i!:
"
I
8
75
6
5.0
2.5
•
rOWTTH
2
AT!25 0 C
o
-75
c8
-50
-25
1'\
300
:2
t
25
50
TEMPERATURE,oC
14
16
FIG 13. GREATEST NUMBER OF
CYCLES BEFORE OUTPUT
15.0
~ 10.0
12
BANDWIDTH - % of to
- -r--
50
---t---
30
75
100
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
125
1'\
l:\. '"
I
BANDWIDTH UMITED BY C2
'\l\.
~
"I
40
BANDWIDTH LIMITED BY
EXTESNAL RESISTOR-
I'Vt l 11
MuM
20
10
1
3 • 5
~
10
2J
20
1
30 4050
100
BANDWIDTH", 0110)
255
LM567L
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
FIG 15. TYPICAL CENTER FREQUENCY DRIFT
WITH TEMPERATURE(V cc 5V,Rl 80kIJ,fo 1KHz)
FIG 14. POWER SUPPLY DEPENDENCE'
OF CENTER FREQUENCY
=
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
5'
I
0.8
I
f------
il
I
=
I
1-
..........
'\
100
Ii
0.7
I 0.6
~
=
100
0.5
~
0.4
~ -200
1/
IE
~-309
I
0.3
0.2
f\
\
d
·w
-400
0:1
o
0.1
2
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
3
45
10
-500
-25.
o·
25
50
75
TEMPERATURE, ·C
CENTER FREQUENCY - KHz
FIG 16. TYPICAL FREQUENCY DRIFT
AS A FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE
cti:
r--fo_1KHz
"""';;;:::
f'\ "'\I\.
\
V+=5V
-4
-25
c8
25
TEMPERATURE, ·C I
50
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTO!=I.
75
256
MC1488
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
QUAD LINE DRIVER
The MC1488 is a monolithic quad line driver designed to interface data
terminal equipment with data communications equipmen,t in conformance with the specifications of EIA Standard No. RS-232C.
FEATURES
Current Limited Output: ± 10mA typ
Power-Off Source Impedance: 300 Ohms (min)
Simple Slew Rate Control with External Capacitor
Flexible Operating Supply Range
Compatible with OTL and TTL, HCTLS Families
•
•
•
•
•
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
I
(1/4 of Circuit Shown)
vee 14
300
OUTPUT
PIN 6,8,11 or3
GND7
ORDERING INFORMATION
Device
Package
MC1488N
14 DIP
MC1488D
14 SOP
Operating Temperature
0-
+ 70·C
J
10K
70
VEE 1
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta = 25°C unless otherwise noted)
Characteristic
~
Symbol
value
Unit
Power Supply Voltage
Vee
VEE
+15
-15
VDe
.
Input Voltage Range
V'R
-15sV,R s7.0
Voc
Output Signal Voltage
VD
::1:15
Voc
Power Dissipation
Po
1000
mW'
1/RllJA
6.7
mWJOC
Ta
0-+70
°C
Tstg
-65-+150
°C
Derate Above Ta = + 25°C
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
257
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MC1488
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Vcc~9.0±1%V, VEE~-9.0
± 1%V, Ta~0-70°C unless otherwise noted)
Characteristic
Symbol
Input Current 1
I'L
Input Current 2
I'H
Test Conditions
Min
' Low Logic State (V'L ~O)
Unit
Fig
1.0
1.6
mA
1
10
/LA
1
V
2
V
2
(V'H~5.0V)
VOH
V'L ~0.8V, RL ~3.0K(l
Vee~13.2V, VEE~-13.2V
V'H~1.9V, RL~3.0K(l
Vee~9.0V, VEE~-9.0V
Output Voltage-Low Logic State
Max
High Logic State
V'L ~0.8V, RL ~3.0K(l
Vce~9.0V, VEE~ -9:0V
Output Voltage-High Logic State
Typ
VOL
V,~~1.9V, RL~3.0K(l
Vee~13.2V, VEE~-13.2V
6
7
9
10.5
-6
-7
-9
-10.5
Output Short Circuit .current
108+
Positive
6
10
12
mA
3
Output Short Circuit Current
108-
Negative
-6
-10
-12
mA
3
Output Resistance
Ro
Vee~VEE~O, Vo~
Positive Supply Cur~ent(RL=oo)
lee
±2.0V
300
!l
V'H~1.9V, Vee~+9.0V
15
V'L~0.8V, Vcc~
4.5
6
V'H~1,9V, Vce~+12V
19
25
V'L=0.8V, Vce=+12V
5.5
7
+9.0V
20
12
V'L=0.8V, Vee=+15V
-13
V'H=1.9V, VEE=-9.0V
-17
Power Consumption
-18
V'H=1.9V, VEE =-12V
Pe
mA
-15
p.A
-23
mA
-15
p.A
V'L =0.8V, VEE = -9.0V
lEE
5
34
V'H= 1.9V, Vee = + 15V
Negative Supply Curren't (RL=QO)
mA
V'L=0.8V, VEE = -12V
V'H=1.9V, VEE =-15V
-34
mA
V'L=0.8V, VEE =-15V
-2.5
mA
Vee~9.0V,
333
VEE=-9.0V
Vee = 12V, VEE,," -12V
5
mW
576
* MaximLim packa'ge power dissipation may be exceeded if all outputs are shorted simultaneously.
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Vee=9.0±1%V, VEE =-9±1%V, Ta=0-25°C)
Characteristic
Typ
Max
Unit
Fig
ZL =3.0K and 15pF
275
350
nS
6
ZL =3.0K and 15pF
45
75
nS
6
ZL =3.0K and 15pF
55
100
nS
6
ZL =3.0K and 15pF
110
175
nS
6
Symbol
Test Conditions
Propagation' Delay Time
tpLH
Fall Time
tTHL
trLH
Rise Time
Propugation Delay Time
c8
tpHL
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
Min
258
MC1488
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
DC TEST CIRCUIT
FIGURE 1 INPUT CURRENT
FIGURE 2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
+1.9V
J
3K
VIL
1
+5V
FIGURE 3 OUTPUT SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
Vee
FIGURE 4 OUTPUT RESISTANCE (POWER OFF)
VEE
+1.9V
L
vee
±2Vdc
±6mAMax
ciS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
259
II
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MC1488
FIGURE 5 POWER SUPPLY CURRENTS
+1.9V
J
MC1488
VIL
+0.8V
Vee
FIGURE 6 SWITCHING RESPON~E
-"':""""'-i------'OVO
VINO~-D---1--3K
15PF
vo----tTHL and ItTLH Measured 10% to 90%
c8
SAMSUNG .SEMICONDUCTOR .
260
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MC1488
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
FIGURE 7 - TRANSFER CHARACTERISTICS
V. POWER-SUPPLY VOLTAGE
FIGURE 8 - SHORT CIRCUIT OUTPUT CURRENT
V. TEMPERATURE
+12
+9.0
r-
V"'r'r-r
+6D
- - -- - -
Vcc=6V, VEE'''''-6V
f-- r-
--
--
Vcc-9V, VEE--9V
r-- -
II
V'~VO
3K
-9D
-12~
o
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8 2.0
__~__~__~~__L -__L-__L -__~
-55
+125
T, TEMl>ERATURE ("ell
FIGURe 9 - OUTPUT SLEW RATE V. LOAD
- CAPACITANCE
1000____.
__
i
+75
+25
V", INPUT VOLTAGE (V)
FIGURE 10 - OUTPUT VOLTAGE
AND CURRENT LIMITING CHARACTERISTICS
10 _ __
-
~
w
Iii
II:
~~
5 ===
~ _ V~I,'I~II
r
10
m
IIIWI!
IIIII
10
to L--J....l.1J..Lll1111JJ..-.J-J
1111..LU1.lJJL----L.J..LLllJJl------,-J---LJ--WJlI
to
10
10DOQ
1,000
_1>., CAPACITANCE (pF)
-16 -12
-8.0
-4.0
+4.0
+8.0
+12
+16
Vo, OUTPUT VOLTAIlE'(V)
FIGURE 11 - MAXIMUM OPEATING TEMPERATURE
V. POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
,.
"
14
~
12
I
~ 10
Vee'
ian
.&;3
~
6.0
iii
4_0
i
2D
>
........
3K
ti
OJ
Hi
""
.~
T
,
I
-55
I
+25
+75
+125
T, TEMPERATURE ("ell
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
261
. LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MC1488
APPLICATION INFORMATION
The Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS232C specification detail the requirements for the interface between data
processing equipment and data communications equipment. This standard specifies not only the number and type of interface
leads, but also the voltage levels to be used. The MCl488 quad driver and its companion circuit; the MC1489/A quad receiver,
provide a complete interface system between DTL or TTL logic levels and the RS232C defined levels. The RS232C requirements as applied to drivers are discussed herein .
• The required driver voltages are defined as between 5 and 15-volts in magnitude and are positive for a logic "0" and negative
for a logic "1". These voltages are so defined when the drivers are terminated with a 3000 to 7000-ohm resistor. The MC1488
meets this voltage requirement by converting a DTUTTL logic level into RS232C levels with one stage of inve~ion.
The RS232C specification further requires that during transitions, the driver output slew rate must not exceed 30 volts per
microsecond. The inherent slew rate of the MC1488 is much too fast for ~his requirement. The current limited output of the
FIGURE 12 - SLEW RATE Vs CAPACITANCE
FORlsc=10mA
1000 _
_
100
._.
l
w
Ii
a:
~
OJ
10
C, CAPACITANCE (PF)
device can be used to control this slew rate by connecting a capacitor to each driver output. The required capacitor can be
easily determined by using the relationship C=los x tSf/AV from which Figure 12 is derived. Accordingly, a 33O-pF capacitor on each output will guarantee a worst case slew rate or 30 volts per microsecond.
The interface driver is also required to withstand an accidental short to any other conductor in an interconnecting cable.
The worst possible signal on any conductor would be another driver using a plus or minus 15-volt, 500-mA source. The MCl488
, is designed to indefinitely withstand such a short to all four outputs in a package as long as the power-supply voltages are
greater than 9.0 volts (Le., Vcc~9.0 V:VEE~-9.0V). In some power-supply deSigns, a loss of system power causes a low
impedance on the power-supply outputs. When this occurs, a low impedance to ground would exist at the power inputs to
the MC1488 effectively shorting the 3OO-ohm output resistors to ground. If all four outputs were then shorted to plus or minus
15' volts, the power dissipation in these resistors would be excessive. Therefore, if the system is designed to permit low
o-....-""'T"----~-~ - ,- -----'1"'----
¢M
~
: MCl48s-1
: r--,
I
I
I
o-:-1 __,P-:-<>
o-+-{-~I_-o
o-t-i .._~
1
o-~--r ••-.,
:
o-~--r""
!
o-~- {. __,P-t--o
Fig. 13 - Power supply protection to
meet power-off fault conditions
o-i-.L_}>I-o
" ' __ r ___ J
VEE
1
7.~
+,
O-M--':":-'-~-----'-'-'-+--------:~.!-..L- ----
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
262
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MC1488
impedances to ground at the power-supplies of the drivers, a diode should be placed in each power-supply lead to prevent
overheating in this fault condition. These two diodes, as shown in Figure 8, could be used to decouple all the driver packages in a system. (These same diodes will allow the MC1488 to withstand momentary shorts to the i25-volt limits specified
in the earlier Standard RS232B.) The addition of the diodes also permits the MC1488 to withstand faults with power-supplies
of less than the 9.0 volts stated above.
The maximum short-circuit current allowable under fault conditions is more than guaranteed by the previously mentioned
10mA output current limiting.
Other Applications
The MC1488 is an extremely versatile line driver with a myriad of possible applications. Several features of the drivers
enhance this versatility:
1. Output Current Limiting - this enables the circuit designer to define the output voltage levels independent of power'supplies and can be accomplished by diode clamping of the output pins. Figure 14 shows the MC1488 used as a DTL to MOS
translator where the high-level voltage output is clamped one diode above ground. The resistor divider shown is used to reduce
the output voltage below the 300mV above ground MOS input level limit.
2. Power-Supply Range - as can be seen from the schematic drawing of the drivers, the positive and negative driving
elements of the device are essentially independent and do not require matching power-supplies. In fact, the positive sup-.
ply can vary from a minimum seven volts (required for driving the negative pulldown section) to the maximum specified 15
volts. The negative supply can vary from approximately -2.5 volts to the minimum specified the positive or negative supplies as long as the current output limits are not exceeded. The combination of the current-limiting and supply-voltage features allow a wide combination of possible outputs within the same quad package. Thus if only a portion of the four drivers
are used for driving RS232C lines, the remainder could be used for DTL to MOS or even DTL to DTL translation.Figure 15
shows one such combination.
FIGURE 14DTLITTL-TO-MOS TRANSLATOR
FIGURE 15 LOGIC TRANSLATOR APPLICATIONS
+12V
IJTL
MOSOUTPUT
(WITH VsS~GND)
DTL
TTL
INPUT
lK
10K
DTL
NAND ......... I - l -.....J:H--<,......---,>----'-f'--O DTL OUTPUT
GATE
-O.7V 10 +5.7V
INPUT
CTL
M.HTL
INPUT
-12V
-12V
D--+-o--,..---r--O RTL OUTPUT
-O.7V to +3.7V
INPUT
DTL
MOS
INPUT
TYPICAL APPLICATION
+12V
LINE DRIVER
MC1488
INTERCONNECTING. LINE RECEIVER
CABLE
MC1489
-12V
PIN CONNECTIONS
...r--'~...r--,0- TTLlDTL
TTLlDTL -I
-L __ /
"1- __ "
I
I
I-I
I
I
I
--l
I
I
INTERCONNECTING
CABLE
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
263
II
MC1489/MC1489A
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
QUAD LINE RECEIVER
'14 DIP
The MC1489 monolithic quad line receivers are designed to interface
data terminal equipment with data communications equipment in conformance with the specifications of EIA Standard No. RS-232C.
FEATURES
• Input Resistance - 3.0KO to 7.0KO
• Input Signal Range - ± 30 Volts
• Response Control
a) Logic Threshold Shifting
b) Input Noise Filtering
• Input Threshold Hysteresis Built in
14
SOP
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(1/4 OF CIRCUIT SHOWN)
r---....-~--Ov~
14
9K
1.6K
ORDERING INFORMATION
RESPONSE
RF
CONTR0lO---_p----...."N\,....-+---;
Pins 2, 5, 9, 12
Device
MC1489N
OUTPUT
Pins3,S,8,n
3.55K
INPUT
Pins 1, 4, 10, 13
MC1489AN
MC1489D
MC1489AD
Package Operating Temperature
14 DIP
0-+ 7Q·C
14 SOP
10K
7
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta =25°C)
Characteristic
~er
Supply Voltage
Symbol
Value
Unit
Vee
.10
Voc
Input Voltage Range
V'R
±30
Voe
Output Load Current
IL
20
mA
Po
1/IJJA
1000
6.7
mW
mWI"C
T.
Oto +70
°C
Power Dissipation
Derate Above T. = + 25"C
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
ciS
SAMS,-!NG SEMICONDUCTOR'
Tstg
-65 to +150
°C
264
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
MC1489/MC1489A
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Vee =5.0± 10%V, Ta =0 _70°C unless otherwise noted)
Characteristic
Test Conditions
.Symbol
Positive Input Current
Min
V,H =25Vdc
3.6
V,H =3.0Vdc
0.43
r---'
I'H
-3.6
r-'
I'L
Input Turn-On Thereshold Voltage
MC1489
MC1489A
""
..
1.0
1.75
_--- r----
Ta=25°C, VOH 2: 2.5V,
ic=O.5mA
. Output Voltage High
VOH
V,H =0.75V,IL=-0.5mA
Input Open, IL = - 0.5mA
Output Voltage Low
VOL
V,L =3.0V,IL=10mA
Output Short Circuit Current
8.3
mA
~--.
~--
-8.3
mA
Ta=25°C, VOL s 0.45V
V'L
Input Turn-Off Threshold Voltage
--
Unit
-0.43
V'L = -3.0Vdc
V,H
..
1----
Max
"- - - -1 - - -f----
V,L =-25Vdc
Negative Input Current-
TYP
1.5
2.25
Vdc
1.25
Vdc
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
Vdc
1.95
--
0.75
2.5
2.5
los
Power Supply Current
lee
All gates "on", lOUT =OmA,
V'H=5.0V
Power Consumption
Pe
V'H=5.0V
I--.
0.2
0.45
Vdc
-3.0
-4.0
mA
16
26
mA
80
130
mW
TYP
Max
Unit
25
120
25
10
85
175
50
20
nS
nS
nS
nS'
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Vee=5.0±1%V, Ta =25°C, See Fig. 1)
Characteristic
Propagation Delay Time
Rise Time
Propagation Delay Time
Fall Time
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
RL=3.9KO
RL=3.9KO
RL=3900
RL=3900
tpLH
IrLH
tpHL
IrHL
TYPICAL APPLICATION
PIN CONNECTIONS
LINE DRIVER
MC1488
INTERC0NNEcriNG
LINE RECEIVER
MC1489
...r---~--""t
TTLlDTL-=!. __
~>
~
L-/
... __ ..~ TTLlDTL
InputA 1
Response
ControlA 2
12 Response
Control 0
I
I
I
--;
!
:
I
r--
I
I
INTERCONNEcrlNG
CABLE
c8 SAMSUN~
SEMICONDUCTOR
Response
ControlB
Inpu1C
9 Response
Comrol C
Ground 7
8 OutputC
265
II
MC1489/MC1489A
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
TEST CIRCUIT
SWITCHING RESPO~SE
Fig 1 -
Fig 2 -
RESPONSE CONTROL NODE
VR
R
~----~----~~----VO
Vln
~
O%
Vin
+3V
Jr
C~
CL
RESPONSE NODE
Von --~1/4-:--1
50%
tPHL
_ _ . - - - - - - - . Vo
MCI489A
tPlH
ITLH and ITHL
vo
C; capacitor is for noise filtering
R. relstor Is for threshold shifting
measured
10%-90%
. CL _15pF=total parasitic capacitance, which includes
probe and wiring capacitances ,
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
(Vcc=5.0 Vdc Ta = + 25°C unless otherwise noted)
Fig. 4 - TYPICAL TURN-ON THRESHOLD V.
CAPACITANCE FROM RESPONSE CONTROL PIN 10
GND
Fig. 3 - TYPICAL TURN-ON THRESHOLD V.
CAPACITANCE FROM RESPONSE CONTROL PIN 10
GND
MC1489
~
• I------'\---+---+-----'lrl-------\
~
i3~~~~~r+--~
IL-~--=:::~~
10
100
1000
PW, INPUT PULSE WIDTH (..,
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
10.000
10
100
1000
10,000
PW, INPUT PULSE WIDTH (nl,
266
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MC1489/MC1489A
MC1489 INPUT THRESHOLD
VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
Fig. 6 Fig. 5 -INPUT CURRENT
+10
6.0
+8.0
5D
+6.0
./
V
1./
/'
AT
AT
5K
13K
AT
AT
~
11K
V"
V,h
v"
+5V
+5V
-5V
YEO
AT
if, VIII
./
/'
-6D
Y
-6.0
-
'-
L-
VILH
:::
V,HL
~
-10
-25-20
-15
-10
VIN,
-5.0
0
+5.0
+10 +15
+20 +25
-3.0 -2.0 -1.0
INPUT VOLTAGE (V)
Fig. 7 - MC1489A INPUT THRESHOLD
VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
-
2.
22
5D
...
iw
A,
AT
5K
~r·
11K
v"
V"
+5V
-5V
AT
V"
~
g
0
20
18
16
,.
6X
12
II:
10
....
....
:J
DB
[3
X
-
0-
V,LH
-30 -20 -10
0
=
V'Hl
+3.0 +2.0 +10
Fig. 8 - INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE
VB. TEMPERATURE
8.0
AT
0
VI, INPUT VOLTAGEi(V)
--r--
MC1489A V,LH
r-- - I -
-
~VIt-l
r--
MC1489V,LH
MC1489A VlI..H
il! 0.6
ii
I--
> 0.4
0.2
+10 +20 +30 +40
-60
VI, INPUT VOLTAGE (V)
+120
T, TEMPERATURE (Ge)
Fig. 9 -INPUT THRESHOLD VB.
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
2.0
V,HLM 1489A
V,HL MC1489
V,LH MC1489
VllH
MC1489A
,.
o
o
'D
c8
12
6.0
Vee POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
M
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
267
MC14891MC1489A
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
APPLICATION INFORMATION
General Information
The Electronic Industries Association (EIA) has released the R8-232C specification detailing the requirements for the interface between data processing equipment and data communications equipment. This standard specifies not only the number
and type of interface leads, but also the voltage levels to be used. The MC1488 quad driver and its companion circuit, the
MC1489 quad receiver, provide a complete interface system between OfL or TTL logic levels and the R8-232C defined levels.
The RS-232C requirements as applied to receivers are discussed herein.'
.
The required 'input impedance is defined as between,30oo ohms and 7000 ohms for input voltages between 3.0 and 25
volts in magnitude; and any voltage on the receiver input in an open circuit condition must be le,ss than 2.0 volts in magnitude. The MC1489 circuits meet these requirements with a maximum open circuits meet these requirements with a maximum open circuit voltage of one VeE.
The receiver shall detect a voltage between -3.0 and -25 volts as a Logic "1" and inputs between +3.0 and +25 volts
as a Logic "0". On some interchange leads, an open circuit of power "OFF" condition (300 ohms or more to ground) shall
be decoded as an "OFF" condition or Logic "1". For this reason, the input hystereSiS thresholds ofthe MC1489 circuits are
all above ground. Thus an open or grounded input will cause the same output as a negative or Logic "1" input.
Device Characteristics
The MC1489 interface receivers have internal feedback from the second stage to the input stage providing input hysteresis for noise rejection. The MC1489 input has typical turn-on voltage of 1.25 volts and turn-off of 1.0 volt for typical hysteresis of 250mV. The MC1489A has typical turn-on of 1.95 volts and turn.-off of 0.8 volt for typically t 15 volts of hysteresis.
'Each receiver section has an external response control node in addition to the input and output pins, thereby allowing the
designer to vary the input threshold voltage levels. A resistor can be connected between this node and an external powersupply. Figures 2, 6 1and 7 illustrate the input threshold voltage shift possible through this technique.
This response node can also be used for the filterin!) of high-frequency, high-energy noise pulses. Figures 3 and' 4 show
typical noise-pulse rejection for external capacitors of various sizes.
These two operations on the response node can be combined or used individually for many combinations of interfacing
applications. The MC1489 circuits are particularly useful for interfacing between MOS circuits and OfLffTL logic systems.
In this application, the input threshold voltages are adjusted (with the appropriate supply and resistor ,values) to fall in the
center of the MOS voltage logic levels. (See Figure 9).
The response node may alSo be used as the receill6r input as long as the designer realizes that he may not drive this node
with a low impedance source to a voltage greater than one diode above ground or less than one diode below ground. This
feature is demonstrated in Figure10 where two receivers are slaved to the same line that must still meet the RS-232C
impedance requirement.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
268
MC1489/MC1489A
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
Fig. 10 - TYPICAL TRANSLATOR APPLICATION - MOS TO DTL OR TTL
+5Vdc
.
r---...\
R
--1L. ___..."
OTL or TIL
r .. - .....
---l
,
II
+svdclrh'
Fig. 11'- TYPICAL PARALLELING OF TWO MC1489/A RECEIVERS TO MEET RS-232C
Vcc
RESPONSE CONTROL PIN"
r- - ---------- - - --I
i
1/2 MC1489
. . . . .-t<'
IN'~PU~T~_;'8:,:K~.Li-'----~+-H_
OUTPUT
vcco--+----------,
OUTPUT
INPUT
8K
RESPONSE CONTROL PIN
J
I
I
I
I
IL _______________________ JI
ciS SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
269
LINEAR INTEGRATED. CIRCUIT
MC3361
16 DIP
LOW POWER NARROW BAND FM IF
The MC3361 is designed for use in FM dual conversion communication
equipment. It contains a complete narrow band FM demodulation system
operable to less than 2.SV supply voltage.
.
FEATURES
16 SOP
• Includes: Oscillator, Mixer, limiting Amp, Quadrature Discriml·
nator, Active Filter, Squelch, Scan Control, and'Mute Switch
• Stable operation with wide supply voltage (2.5V to 7.0V)
• Low drain current (4.0mA "lYP. at Vcc =4.0V)
• Excellent Input Sensitivity
(-3dB limiting, 2.0"Vrms "lYp.)
• Minimum number of external parts required.
ORDERING INFORMATION
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Device
Package
MC3361N
16 DIP
MC3361D
16 SOP
Operating Temperature
-20
-+ 10·C
SQUELCH TRIGGER WITH
HYSTERESIS
·DEMODUlAlOR
Fig. 1
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
270
MC3361
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Ta =25°C)
Characteristic
Supply Voltage
Detector Input Voltage
Input Voltage (Vcc;;,4.0V)
Mute Function
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
value
Unit
10
1.0
1.0
-0.5- +5.0
-20- +70
-65- + 150
V
Vp.. p
Vrms
Vpeak
°C
°C
Symbol
Vcc
Vo
V'6
V'4
Top.
TSIg
II
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Vee =4.0V, fo=10.7MHz, .:If= ± 3KHz, fmod =1KHz, Ta =25°C, Unless Otherwise Specified)
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
lee
Squelch Off
Squelch On
4.0
6.0
mA
Input Limiting Voltage
V,NL
-3dB Limiting
2.0
/LV
Detector Output Voltage
V7
2.0
V
Detector Output Impedance
Zoo
400
ohm
Recovered Audio Output Voltage
Vo
V,N =10mV
100
150
mVrms
Filter Gain
AVF
f= 10KHz, V,N:= 5mV
40
48
dB
Filter Output Voltage
VOF
1.5
V
Trigger Hysteresis
VTH
50
mV
Mute Function Low
ROL
·10
ohm
Mute Function High
ROH
10
Mohm
Scan Function Low
V'31
Mute Off (V'2= 2V)
Scan Function High
V'3H
Mute On (V'2=GND)
Mixer Conversion Gain
AVM
24
dB
Mixer Input Resistance
R,
3.3
Kohm
Mixer Input CapaCitance
C,
2.2
pF
Circuit Current
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
0.5
V
V
3.0
271
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MC3361
PIN CONNECTIONS
Pin 1: Oscillator
Pin 3: Mixer Output
Pin 5: Limiter Input
Pin 7: Limiter Output
Pin 9: Recovered Audio Output
Pin 11: Filter Output
Pin 13: Scan Control
Pin 15: GND
Pin 2: Oscillator
Pin 4: Vcc
Pin 6: Decoupling
Pin 8: Quad Coil
Pin 10: Filter Input
Pin 12: Squelch In
Pin 14: Mute
Pin 16: Mixer Input
'rEST CIRCUIT
vee
1--;---<> MIXER INPUT
MURATA
CFU
4550
1 - - - - - - < > AUDIO MUTE
1 - - - - - - - 0 SCAN CONTROL
MC3361
l - - - - - - < > SQUELCH IN
~--'-tt---o
FILTER OUT
)-+--'II\f¥-'-H--O FILTER IN
1-"""'~1"""---o AF OUTPUT
Quad coil
Tokotype
RMC-2A6597HM
Fig, 2
c8
SAMSUNG SEM,ICONDUCTOR
272
MC3361
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (see block diagram)
Th~ MC3361 functions include an Oscillator, Mixer, FM IF limiting amplifier, FM demodulator, OP-amp, Scan control and
Mute switch.
The mixer combines the crystal controlled oscillator to convert the input frequency from 10.7MHz to an intermediate frequency of 455KHz, where, after external bandpass filtering, most of the amplification is done. A conventional quadrature
detector is used to demodulate the FM signal. The a of the quad coil, which is determined by the external resistor placed
across it, has multiple affects on the audio output. Increasing the a increases output level because of nonlinearities in the'
tank phase characteristic.
After detection and de-emphasis, the audio output at pin 9 is partially filtered, then buffered by an emitter follower. The
signal still requires voiume control and further amplification before driving loudspeaker.
The op amp inverting input (pin 10) which is internally referenced to 0.7V, receives DC bias from the output of pin 11 through
the external feedback network. It is normally utilized as either a bandpass filter to extrect a specific frequency from th audio
output, such as a ring or dial-tone, or as a highpass filter to detect noise due to no input at the mixer. This information is applied
to pin 12. An external poSitive bias to pin 12 sets up the squelch trigger circuit such that pin 13 is low and the audio mute
(pin 14) is open circuit. If pin 12 is pulled down to 0.5Vdc by the nQise or tone detector, pin 13 will rise to approximately 0.5Vdc
below Vee and pin 14 is internally short circuited to ground. There is 50mV of hysteresis at pin 112 to prevent jitter.;Audio
muting is accomplished by connecting pin 14 to a high-impedance ground-reference'point in the audio path between pin 9
and the audio amplifier.
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
273
II
NOTE
,>."
-~, ~ k'
Voltage Regulator
Device
Function
3 AMP Adjustable Positive Voltage Regulator' '
Regulator Pulse Width Modulator
3·Terrninal Positive Adjustable Regulator
3-Terminal Positive Voltage Regulator
Precision Voltage Regulator
Switching Regulator,
3A Positive Voltage Regulator
3·Terrnihal 1A Positive Voltage'Regulator
3·Terrninal Positive Voltage Regulator
3-Terminal 0.5A Positive Voltage Regulator
3·Terrnlnal Negative V.olt;lge Regulator
3·Terrninal 0.5A 'Negative Voltage Regulator
KA350
KA3524 '
LM317
LM323
LM723
KA78540
KA78TXX
MC78XX
~C78LXX
MC78MXX
MC79XX
MC79MXX
Package
TO-3P
16 DIP
TO·220
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP(14 SOP
16 ,DIP
TO·22O
TO·22O
TO·92
TO·22O
TO·22O
TO·220
Page
277
285
291
423 '
300
306
312
323
353
364
377
387
, Voltage ,Reference
KA336·5.0
KA385-1.2
KA431
•
Voltage Reference Diode
Micropower Voltage Reference Diode
Programmable Precision Reference
TO·92
TO·92
TO·9218 DIP/8 SOP
393
397
401
8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
10 SIP HIS
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP/9 SIP
407
407
412
419
421
423
432
438
423
432
438 '
446
423
438
452
456
456
463
Operational Amplifier
KA201 A
KA301A
KA733C
KA9256
KF351
, LM224/A
L"M248
LM2581A
LM324/A
LM348
LM3581A/S
LM741C/ElI
.LM2902
LM2904
MC14581C/S/I
MC3303
MC3403
MC4558C/AC/I
Single Operational Amplifier
Single Operational Amplifier
Differential Video Amplifier
Dual Power Operational Amplifier
Single Operational Amplifier
Quad Operational Amplifier
Quad Operational Amplifier'
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Quad Operational Amplifier
Single Operational Amplifier
Quad Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Quad Operational Amplifier
quad Operational' Amplifier
Dual Operational Amplifier
Voltage Comparator
, KA319
KA3.61
KAnOC
LM211
LM239/A
LM293/A
LM311
LM339/A
LM3931A1S
LM2901
LM2903
LM3302
Dual High Speed Voltage Comparator
High Speed Voltage Comparator
High Speed Voltage Comparator
Voltage Comparator
Quad Differential Comparator
Dual Differential Comparator
Voltage Comparato!
Quad Differential Comparator
Dual Differential Comparator
Quad Differential Comparator
Dual Differential Cpmparator
Quad Differential Comparator
' 14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIPI8 SOP
·8 DIP/S SOP
14 DIP/14, SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
S DIP/S SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
468
472
474
476
481
489
476,
481
489
481
489
481
CMOS Timer
CMOS Timer
CMOS Timer
Timer
Dual Timer
Dual Timer
-8 DIP/8 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
8 DIP/8 SOP
14 DIP/14 SOP
16 DIP/16 SOP
496
501
505
Timer'
KS555
KS555H
KS556
NE555
.NE556
NE558
509
513
516
.LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA350
3 AMP ADJUSTABLE POSITIVE VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
1"O-3P
The KA350 is adjustable 3-terminal positive voltage regulator capable
of supplying in excess of 3.0A over an output voltage range of 1.2V to 33V.
This voltage regulator is exceptionally easy to use and require only two
external resistors to set the output voltage. Further, they employ internal
current limiting, thermal shutdown and safe area compensation, making
them essentially blow-out proof. All overload protection circuitry remains
fully functional even if the adjustment terminal is accidentally
disconnected.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Output adjustable between 1_2V and 33V
Guranteed 3A output current
Intemal thermal overload protection
Load regulation typically 0-1 %
Line regulation typically O_005%N
Intemal short-circuit current limiting constant
with temperature.,
.
Output transistor safe-area compensation
Floating operation for high voltage application
Standard 3-lead transistor package
Eliminates stoc~ing many fixed voltages
1: Ad)
II
2: Output 3: Input
ORDERING INFORMATION
Operating Temperature
o -J25~C
BLOCK DIAGRAM
VOLTAGE
REFERENCE
ADJ
c8 ~AM~UNG
SEMICONDUCTOR
PROTECTION
CIRCUITRY
OUT
277
KA350
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
, ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Characteristic
Symbol
Value
Unit
Input-Output Voltage Differential
V,-Vo
35
Vee
Soldering Lead Temperature
(10 Seconds)
T 'ead
300
°C
Power Dissipation
Po
Internally limited
Operating Temperature Range
TI
0- + 125
°C
T.,g
-65-+150
°C
Storage Temperature Range
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(V , - Vo = 5V, 10 = 1.5A, T, = aoc to 125°C; Pmax , unless otherwise speCified)
Characteristic
Test Conditions
,Symbol
Line Regulation
6Vo
Ta=25°C,3V-s.V,-Vo-s.35V
(Note 1)
Load Regulation
6Vo
Ta=25°C,10mA-s.lo-s.3A
Vo-s.5V (Note 1)
Vo~5V (Note 1)
Adjustment Pin Current
lad!
Adjustment Pin Current Change
61",,;
3V-s.V, -Vo -s.35V,
10mA-s.IL-s.3A, PO-s.PMAX
Thermal Regulation
VTAG
Pulse";20mS, Ta=25°C
Reference Voltage
' VAEF
Line Regulation
Load Regulation
3V-s.V, -Vo -s.35V,10mA-s.lo-s.3A
6Vo
3.0V-s.V,- Vo-s.35V
6Vo
10mA -s.lo-s.3.QA
Vo-s.5.0V
Min
1.2
Vo~5.0V
Temperature Stability
Ts
Maximum Output Current
IMAx
, Minimum Load Current
to Maintain Regulation
ILMIN
RMS Noise, % of Vo
Ripple Rejection
Long-Term Stability
Tj=O°C to 125°C
,
Max
Unit
0.005
0.03
%N
5
0.1
25
0.5
mV
%N~
tJA,
50
100
0.2
5.0
0.002
"A
%IW
1.25
1.30
V
0.02
0.07
%N
20
0.3
70
1.5
mV
%\(0
1.0
%Vo
V, -Vo::;10V, PO-s.PMAX
3.0
4.5
A
V, -Vo=30V, PO-s.PMAX, Ta=25°C
0.25
1.0
A
3.5
V,-Vo=35V
VN
10Hz-s.f-s.10KHz, Ta=25°C
RR
Vo =10V, f=120Hz,
without CAOJ
CAOJ = 10"F
S
Typ
Tj =125°C
66
10
mA
0.003
%Vo
65
dB
dB
80
0.3
1
%
Note 1: Regul'ation is measured at constant junction temperature. Changes in output voltage due to heating effects
must be taken into account separately. Pulse testing with low duty cycle is used.
ciS
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
278
KA3S0
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTIC
0.4
tw
"
0.2
i
r"",,-
-
t-5OOmA-
w
...!i;.!:5A
~-O.2
g
T,=25:'(;'-
\
~~
!;-O.4
~
\
05- 0.6
>
1
Fig. 28
284
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA3524
REGULATOR PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR
16 DIP
The KA3524 regulating pulse width modulator contains all of the
control circuitry necessary to implement switching regulators of either
polarity, transformer coupled DC to DC converters, transformerless
polarity converters and voltage doublers, as well as other power control
applications. This device includes a 5V voltage regulator capable of
supplying up to 50mA to external circuitry, a control amplifier, an
oscillator(a pulse width modulator, a phase splitting flip-flop, dual
alternating output switch transistors, and current limiting and shut-down
circuitry. Both the regulator output transistor"and each output switch
are internally current limiting and, to limit junction temperature, an
internal thermal shutdown 'circuit is employed.
FEATURES
• Complete PWM power control circuitry
• Frequency adjustable to greater than 100KHz
• 2% frequency stability with temperature
• Total quiescent current less than 10mA
• Dual alternating output switchs for both push-pull or slngle-ended
applications
• Current limit amplifier provides external component protection
• On-chip protection against excessive junction temperllture and
output current
• SV, SOmA linear regulator output available to user
ORDERING
I
INFORMATION
Operetlng Temperature
BLOCK D.IAGRAM
0-70·C
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT
CURRENT
LIMIT
GROUND
(SUBSTRATE)
Fig_ 1
c8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
285
KA3524
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Characteristic
Symbol
Value
Unit
Input Voltage
Reference Output Current
Output Current (Each Output)
Oscillator Changing Currerit (pin 6 or 7)
Lead Temperature (Soldering, 10 sec)
Power Dissipation
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature .
VIN
lrel
40
50
100
5
300'
1000
0-+70
-65-+150
V
mA
mA
mA
·C
mW
·C
·C
10
Ic~arge
Tlead
Po
Topr
Tstg
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(YIN = 20V, f = 20KHz, Ta = 0 to 70·C unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
Characteristic
REFERENCE SECTION
Test Conditions
Max
Unit
5.0
5.4
V
Min Typ
.
Output Voltage
Vref
4.6
Line Regulation
Vlln•
VIN =8-40V
10
30
mV
Load Regulation
VIOad
IL =0-20mA
20
50
mV
Ripple Rejection
VRR
f = 120Hz, Ta= 25·C
66
dB
Short-Circuit Output Current
Isc
Vrel=O, Ta=25·C
100
mA
Temperature Stability
0.3
Ta=25·C
Long Term Stability
1
%
20
mV/Khr
350
KHz
OSCILLATOR SECTION
Maximum Frequency
fMAX
Initial Accuracy
CT = 0.001ILF, RT = 2KD .
RT and CT constant
%
5
. VIN =8-40V, Ta=25·C
Frequency Change with Voltage
6f
1
Frequency Change with Temperature
6f
Over operating temperature range
%
2
Output Amplitude (Pin 3)
VA3
Ta=25·C
3.5
%
V
. Output Pulse Width (Pin 3)
V3PW
CT=0.01ILF, Ta=25·C
0.5
ILs
Input Offset Voltage
VIO
VCM=2.5V
2
10
Input Bias Current
liB
VCM=2.5V
2
10
ERROR AMPLIFIER SECTION
Open Loop Voltage Gain
Common·Mode Input Voltage Range
Common·Mode Rejection Ratio
Small Signal Bandwidth
Output Voltage Swing
c8
60
Avo
VCR
Ta=25·C
CMRR
Ta=25·C
BW
Av=OdB, Ta=25·C
Vosw
Ta=25·C
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
80
1.8
~
dB
3.4
70
V
dB
MHz
3
0.5
mV
3.8
V
286
KA3524
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)
(V,N=20V, f=20KHz, Ta=0-70°C unless otherwise specified)
Characteristic
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min Typ
Max
Unit
COMPARATOR SECTION
Maximum Duty Cycle
DCm..
% Each output on
Input Threshold (Pin 9)
VTH ,
Zero duty cycle
1
Input Threshold (Pin 9)
VTH2
Maximum duty cycle
3.5
V
1
,.A
Input Bias Current
45
Ie
%
V
CURRENT LIMITING SECTION
'Sense Voltage
V(Pin 2) - V(Pin 1)~50mV
Pin 9=2V, Ta=25°C
Vsense
180
Sense Voltage T.C.
200
220
mV/oC
0.2
Common-Mode Current
0.7
mV
1
V
,0.1
50
,.A
1
2
V
OUTPUT SECTION (EACH OUTPUT)
Collector-Emitter Voltage
VCEO
Collector Leakage Current
ILKQ
VcE =40V
Saturation Voltage
VSAT
IC=50mA
40
Emitter Output Voltage
VE
V'N =20V,
Rise Time (10% to 90%)
tr
Fall Time (90% to 10%)
tf
ISTD
Total Standby Current
17
V
18
V
RC=2KIl, Ta=25°C
0.2
,.s
RC=2KIl, Ta=25°C
0.1
,.s
V'N=40V, PINS 1, 4, 7, 8,11
and 14 are grounded, Pin 2=2V
All other inputs and
outputs open
5
10
mA
APPLICATION INFORMATION
Voltage Reference
An internal series regulator provides a nominal 5 volt output which is used both to generate a reference voltage
and is the regulated source for all the internal timing and controlling circuitry. This regulator may be bypassed
for operation from a fixed 5 volt supply by connecting pins 15 and 16 together to the input voltage. In this configuration,
thE> maximum input voltage is 6.0 volts.
This reference regulator may be used as a 5 volt source for other circuitry. It will provide up to 50mA of current
itself and can easily be expanded to higher current with an external PNP as' shown in Figure 2.
EXPANDED REFERENCE CURRENT CAPABILITY
VREF
+
10~J ~E~~~~~G ON
CHOICE FOR 0,
GNDo---------------+-------~-o
Fig. 2
i8
SAMSUNG SEMICONDUCTOR
287
II
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
KA3524
Oscillator
The oscillator in the KA3524 uses an external resistor (RT) to establish a constant charging c;urr!!nt into an external
capacitor (CT). While this uses more current than a series connected RC, it provides a linear ramp voltage on the
capacitor which ,is also used as a reference for the comparator. The charging current is equal to 3.6V + RT and
should be kept within the range of approximately 30~ to 2mA, i.e., 1.SK Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2017:06:21 20:13:23-08:00 Modify Date : 2017:06:21 20:36:47-07:00 Metadata Date : 2017:06:21 20:36:47-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:3031f13a-73ae-5042-be66-d9824af6a5ed Instance ID : uuid:13058252-5330-be44-b548-a3d38edc02e2 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 636EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools